HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology

HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP
with Edgeline Technology
Software Technical Reference
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with
Edgeline Technology
Software Technical Reference
Copyright and license
Trademark credits
©2007 Copyright Hewlett-Packard
Development Company, L.P.
Adobe®, Adobe Photoshop®, Acrobat®,
PostScript®, and the Acrobat logo® are
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Reproduction, adaptation or translation
without prior written permission is
prohibited, except as allowed under the
copyright laws.
The information contained herein is subject
to change without notice.
The only warranties for HP products and
services are set forth in the express
warranty statements accompanying such
products and services. Nothing herein
should be construed as constituting an
additional warranty. HP shall not be liable
for technical or editorial errors or omissions
contained herein.
Edition 1, 06/2007
Corel® is a trademark or registered
trademark of Corel Corporation or Corel
Corporation Limited.
EnergyStar® and the Energy Star logo®
are US registered marks of the United States
Environmental Protection Agency.
FireWire® FireWire is a trademark of
Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries.
Intel® and Pentium® are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Intel Corporation
or its subsidiaries in the United States and
other countries.
Java™ is a US trademark of Sun
Microsystems, Inc.
Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows NT®,
Windows® XP, and Windows Vista™ are
U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
UNIX® is a registered trademark of The
Open Group.
Table of contents
1  Purpose and scope
Introduction ............................................................................................................................ 1
Device features ....................................................................................................................... 4
Printing-system software ........................................................................................................... 6
System requirements ................................................................................................. 6
Windows ................................................................................................. 6
Macintosh ................................................................................................ 7
Linux ....................................................................................................... 7
UNIX ....................................................................................................... 7
Operating-system support .......................................................................................... 7
Standalone drivers .................................................................................... 8
Print driver support in other operating systems ............................................... 8
Availability ............................................................................................................. 8
Printing-system software on the Web ............................................................ 9
In-box printing-system software CDs ............................................................. 9
Windows installation CD ........................................................... 10
Windows installation CD languages ........................................... 10
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology documentation ............................... 17
Windows installation CD ........................................................................................ 18
Hewlett-Packard CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology
Printing-system Install Notes ...................................................................... 19
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Quick
Reference Guide ..................................................................................... 20
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Use the
Control Panel (PDF Poster) ........................................................................ 21
Macintosh installation CD ....................................................................................... 21
System Administrator's CD ...................................................................................... 22
User Documentation ................................................................................ 22
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology
Quick Reference Guide ............................................................. 23
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Use
the Control Panel (PDF Poster) .................................................... 24
Administrator Documentation .................................................................... 25
Hewlett-Packard CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline
Technology Printing-system Install Notes ....................................... 26
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide ............................................. 27
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology
System Administrator Guide ....................................................... 28
ENWW
iii
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology
System Software Technical Reference .......................................... 28
HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide ................................... 29
Installer Customization Wizard Administrator's Guide ................... 29
2  Software description
Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 31
MS Windows printing-system software ..................................................................................... 32
Printing system and installer ..................................................................................... 32
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology printingsystem software CD for MS Windows systems ............................................. 32
Installer features ...................................................................................... 35
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology drivers ............................ 36
Select the best print driver ........................................................................ 37
Complete printing system ........................................................... 37
HP PCL 6 driver ...................................................................... 37
HP PCL 5 driver ...................................................................... 37
PS Emulation driver .................................................................. 37
HP Universal Print Driver ............................................................ 37
HP print and fax drivers ........................................................................... 38
Driver version numbers for MS Windows operating systems .......................... 38
Windows driver configuration ................................................................................................ 40
Driver autoconfiguration ......................................................................................... 40
Bidirectional communication .................................................................................... 41
Enterprise AutoConfiguration ................................................................................... 41
Update Now ......................................................................................................... 41
HP Driver Preconfiguration ..................................................................................... 43
Lockable features .................................................................................... 44
Continuous export ................................................................................... 45
HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool .................................................................................. 46
HP Embedded Web Server .................................................................................................... 47
Access to the HP EWS ........................................................................................... 47
The HP EWS frame ................................................................................................ 48
Information tab ...................................................................................................... 48
Device Status .......................................................................................... 48
Configuration Page ................................................................................. 49
Supplies Status Page ................................................................................ 51
Event Log Page ....................................................................................... 52
Usage Page ........................................................................................... 54
Device Information .................................................................................. 57
Control Panel Snapshot ............................................................................ 57
Jam History Page .................................................................................... 58
Print ...................................................................................................... 59
Printing a file or updating firmware from the Print page ................. 60
Settings tab ........................................................................................................... 60
Configure Device .................................................................................... 61
Using the menus on the Configure Device page ............................ 61
Notification Server .................................................................................. 62
Configuring outgoing e-mail ....................................................... 62
Configuring the return e-mail address .......................................... 63
iv
ENWW
Alerts ..................................................................................................... 63
AutoSend ............................................................................................... 64
Turn on the AutoSend feature ..................................................... 64
Security ................................................................................................. 65
Device Security ....................................................................................... 65
Restrict Color .......................................................................................... 66
Edit Other Links ....................................................................................... 67
Adding a link ........................................................................... 68
Removing a link ....................................................................... 68
Device Information .................................................................................. 68
Language ............................................................................................... 68
Date & Time ........................................................................................... 69
Date &Time - Advanced ............................................................. 71
Sleep Schedule ....................................................................................... 71
Backup and Restore ................................................................................. 72
Solution Installer ...................................................................................... 73
Digital Sending tab ................................................................................................ 73
Address Book ......................................................................................... 74
E-mail Setup ........................................................................................... 76
Network Folder Setup .............................................................................. 78
Fax tab ................................................................................................................. 79
Fax Send Setup ....................................................................................... 79
Fax Activity Log ...................................................................................... 80
Import Speed Dials .................................................................................. 81
Networking tab ..................................................................................................... 82
Configuration ......................................................................................... 82
Security section ....................................................................................... 83
Diagnostics section .................................................................................. 83
Security ................................................................................................................ 83
Kerberos Authentication .......................................................................................... 84
HP EWS login process ............................................................................................ 84
Protected system ...................................................................................... 85
Unprotected system ................................................................................. 86
Password behavior .................................................................................. 86
HP Web Jetadmin ................................................................................................................ 87
3  Install MS Windows printing-system components
Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 89
Font support ......................................................................................................................... 90
Basic fonts ............................................................................................................ 90
Default fonts .......................................................................................................... 90
Print-driver installation instructions ........................................................................................... 96
General MS Windows installation instructions ............................................................ 96
Install from the Windows printing-system CD ............................................... 96
Install from a network or from downloaded files ........................................... 97
Detailed MS Windows installation instructions ........................................................... 97
Help, Back, Next, and Cancel buttons ....................................................... 97
Direct-connect installation through a USB port ............................................. 98
Unsupported operating system dialog box .................................................. 98
Installation dialog-box sequence ................................................................ 99
ENWW
v
Modify a pre-existing installation ............................................................. 126
Install drivers by using Add Printer ........................................................... 129
Installer Customization Wizard for Windows ............................................ 130
Run the Installer Customization Wizard ..................................... 130
Dialog boxes ......................................................................... 131
Distribution ............................................................................ 148
Point-and-Print installation for Windows Vista, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 ............................................. 148
Set a default printer .............................................................................................. 149
Fax-driver installation instructions .......................................................................................... 150
Minimum firmware ............................................................................................... 150
Install the HP MFP Send Fax driver on MS Windows ................................................. 151
4  HP MFP Send Fax driver
Introduction ........................................................................................................................ 153
Access to the HP MFP Send Fax driver ................................................................................... 154
Driver Properties tabs ........................................................................................... 154
Printing Preferences tabs ....................................................................................... 155
Printing Defaults tabs ............................................................................................ 156
Document Properties tabs ...................................................................................... 156
Help system ....................................................................................................................... 157
What's this? Help ................................................................................................ 157
Context-sensitive Help ........................................................................................... 157
Driver Properties tabs features .............................................................................................. 158
General tab ........................................................................................................ 158
Sharing tab ......................................................................................................... 159
Ports tab ............................................................................................................. 159
Advanced tab ..................................................................................................... 160
Upgrade the HP MFP Send Fax driver ...................................................... 160
Device Settings tab ............................................................................................... 161
About tab ........................................................................................................... 162
Printing Preferences, Printing Defaults, and Document Properties tabs features ............................. 165
Advanced tab ..................................................................................................... 165
Paper/Output ....................................................................................... 166
Copy Count ........................................................................... 167
Collated ................................................................................ 167
Document Options ................................................................................. 167
Advanced Printing Features ...................................................... 167
Paper/Quality tab ................................................................................................ 167
Print Task Quick Sets ............................................................................. 168
Default Print Settings ............................................................... 169
Paper Options ...................................................................................... 169
Size is: .................................................................................. 169
Document preview image ....................................................................... 170
Orientation ........................................................................................... 170
Services tab ........................................................................................................ 170
Device and Supplies Status ..................................................................... 171
Launch Embedded Web Server ............................................................... 171
vi
ENWW
5  HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
Introduction ........................................................................................................................ 173
Access to print drivers in Windows Vista, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and
Windows 2000 ................................................................................................................. 175
Software-program print-dialog box ......................................................................... 175
Print-driver user interface ....................................................................................... 175
Printing Preferences driver tabs ............................................................... 175
Properties driver tabs ............................................................................. 176
Device control panel ............................................................................................. 177
Help system ....................................................................................................................... 178
What's this? Help ................................................................................................ 178
Context-sensitive Help ........................................................................................... 178
Incompatible Print Settings messages ...................................................................... 178
Advanced tab features ........................................................................................................ 180
Paper/Output ...................................................................................................... 181
Copy Count .......................................................................................... 182
Collated ............................................................................................... 182
Graphic .............................................................................................................. 182
Image Color Management ...................................................................... 183
True Type Font ...................................................................................... 183
Document Options ............................................................................................... 183
Advanced Printing Features .................................................................... 184
Print Optimizations ................................................................................ 184
PostScript Options ................................................................................. 184
Printer Features ..................................................................................... 185
Layout Options ..................................................................................... 186
Printing Shortcuts tab features ............................................................................................... 187
Using defined printing shortcuts ............................................................................. 189
Create a custom printing shortcut ........................................................................... 189
Paper/Quality tab features .................................................................................................. 190
Paper Options ..................................................................................................... 191
Page size: ............................................................................................ 192
Custom Paper Size ................................................................................ 193
Name ................................................................................... 193
Paper size ............................................................................. 194
Units ..................................................................................... 194
Custom width and height control limits ....................................... 194
Paper Source: ....................................................................................... 194
Paper Type: .......................................................................................... 195
Special pages: ...................................................................................... 196
Document preview image ...................................................................................... 199
Color Quality ...................................................................................................... 199
Color Quality drop-down menu ............................................................... 200
HP real life technologies ......................................................................... 200
Effects tab features .............................................................................................................. 202
Resizing Options .................................................................................................. 203
Actual Size ........................................................................................... 203
Print Document On ................................................................................ 203
Scale to Fit ........................................................................................... 203
% of Normal Size .................................................................................. 204
ENWW
vii
Document preview image ...................................................................................... 204
Watermarks ........................................................................................................ 205
Current watermarks ............................................................................... 206
Watermark Message ............................................................................. 207
Message Angle ..................................................................................... 207
Font Attributes ....................................................................................... 207
Default watermark settings ...................................................................... 208
Finishing tab features .......................................................................................................... 209
Document options ................................................................................................ 210
Print on Both Sides ................................................................................ 211
Automatically print on both sides .............................................. 211
Flip Pages Up ....................................................................................... 211
Booklet layout ....................................................................................... 212
Book and Booklet Printing ........................................................ 212
Print a booklet ........................................................................ 213
Pages per Sheet .................................................................................... 213
Print Page Borders ................................................................................. 213
Page Order .......................................................................................... 214
Document preview image ...................................................................................... 214
Orientation ......................................................................................................... 214
Output tab features ............................................................................................................. 216
Output Options .................................................................................................... 218
Document preview image ...................................................................................... 219
Output Bin Options .............................................................................................. 219
Job Storage tab features ...................................................................................................... 221
Status group box .................................................................................................. 223
Job Storage Mode ............................................................................................... 223
Off ...................................................................................................... 223
Proof and Hold ..................................................................................... 223
Personal Job ......................................................................................... 223
Quick Copy .......................................................................................... 224
Stored Job ............................................................................................ 224
Make Job Personal ............................................................................................... 224
Job Notification Options ....................................................................................... 224
User Name ......................................................................................................... 225
Job Name ........................................................................................................... 225
Using job-storage features when printing ................................................................. 226
Retrieve a job-storage print job ............................................................... 226
Delete a job-storage print job .................................................................. 226
Color tab features ............................................................................................................... 228
Color Options ..................................................................................................... 229
Color printing option ............................................................................. 230
Neutral grays ....................................................................................... 230
More Color Options .............................................................................. 230
Color Themes ...................................................................................................... 231
Default (sRGB) ...................................................................................... 231
Image Optimization (sRGB) .................................................................... 231
Adobe RGB (1998) ............................................................................... 231
Vivid (sRGB) ......................................................................................... 231
Custom Profile ...................................................................................... 231
viii
ENWW
Document preview image ...................................................................................... 232
Services tab features ........................................................................................................... 233
Device services .................................................................................................... 234
Device Settings tab features .................................................................................................. 235
Form to Tray Assignment ....................................................................................... 237
Font Substitution Table .......................................................................................... 238
External Fonts ...................................................................................................... 239
Installing external fonts ........................................................................... 240
Removing external fonts ......................................................................... 241
PS Emulation driver Device Settings ....................................................................... 241
Available PostScript Memory .................................................................. 242
Output Protocol ..................................................................................... 242
Send Ctrl-D Before Each Job ................................................................... 242
Send Ctrl-D After Each Job ...................................................................... 242
Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray ....................................................... 243
Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray ................................................ 243
Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts .......................................... 243
Job Timeout .......................................................................................... 243
Wait Timeout ........................................................................................ 243
Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline .............................................. 243
Maximum Font Size to Download as Bitmap ............................................. 243
Installable Options ............................................................................................... 244
Automatic Configuration ........................................................................ 244
HP 4000-Sheet Input Tray (Tray 5) ........................................................... 244
Accessory Output Bin ............................................................................. 244
Printer Memory ..................................................................................... 244
Printer Hard Disk ................................................................................... 245
Job Storage .......................................................................................... 245
Mopier Mode ....................................................................................... 245
Mopier mode and collation .................................................................... 245
Postscript Passthrough (PS Emulation driver only) ...................................... 246
JPEG Passthrough (PS Emulation driver only) ............................................ 246
About tab features .............................................................................................................. 247
6  Macintosh
Introduction ........................................................................................................................ 249
Macintosh printing-system software ....................................................................................... 250
Hardware requirements ........................................................................................ 250
Operating-system support ...................................................................................... 250
Availability ......................................................................................................... 250
Printing-system software on the Web ........................................................ 251
Printing-system software ........................................................... 251
Software component availability ............................................... 251
Macintosh installation CD ....................................................................... 251
Macintosh installation CD ........................................................ 251
Macintosh installation CD languages ......................................... 251
Macintosh install and uninstall instructions .............................................................................. 253
Macintosh component descriptions ......................................................................... 253
HP PPDs ............................................................................................... 253
PDEs .................................................................................................... 253
ENWW
ix
HP Embedded Web Server ..................................................................... 253
Readme file .......................................................................................... 254
Install the Macintosh printing system ....................................................................... 254
General installation for Macintosh operating systems ................................. 254
Detailed Mac OS X installation ............................................................... 255
Main Install dialog sequence .................................................... 255
Printer setup ......................................................................................... 260
Set up a printer with Mac OS X V10.4 and later ...................... 260
Set up a printer with Mac OS X V10.3.9 ................................. 264
Set up a printer with Mac OS X V10.2.8 ................................. 268
Troubleshooting the printer setup .............................................. 271
Uninstall the Macintosh printing system ................................................................... 271
HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) ........................................................................................ 271
Access to the HP EWS .......................................................................................... 271
7  Engineering details
Introduction ........................................................................................................................ 273
Remote firmware updates ..................................................................................................... 274
Print the configuration page .................................................................................. 275
Print a menu map .................................................................................. 276
Download the new firmware from the HP Web site ................................................... 276
Download the new firmware to the device ............................................................... 276
Printer messages during the firmware update ........................................................... 277
Remote firmware update by using FTP on a direct network connection ......................... 279
Remote firmware update through an optional parallel port ......................................... 280
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or
Windows Server 2003 ........................................................................ 280
Remote firmware update through an MS Windows network ....................................... 281
Remote firmware update for UNIX systems ............................................................... 282
Remote firmware update by using the LPR command ................................................. 282
Remote firmware update through HP Web Jetadmin .................................................. 283
Print print-ready documents .................................................................................................. 285
Print-ready file printing by using FTP through a browser ............................................. 285
Print-ready file printing by using FTP on a direct network connection ........................... 286
Print-ready file printing by using an optional parallel port .......................................... 287
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or
Windows Server 2003 ........................................................................ 287
Print-ready file printing in an MS Windows network .................................................. 287
Print-ready file printing in UNIX systems .................................................................. 288
Print-ready file printing by using the LPR command .................................................... 288
Paper attributes .................................................................................................................. 289
Paper sources and destinations .............................................................................. 289
Paper-source commands ....................................................................................... 289
Driver-supported paper sizes ................................................................................. 290
Driver-supported paper types ................................................................................. 292
Custom paper sizes .............................................................................................. 293
Media-type commands .......................................................................................... 294
Uninstall ............................................................................................................................ 295
Uninstall the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology printingsystem software by using Windows Add/Remove Program ........................................ 295
x
ENWW
Uninstall the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology printingsystem software by using the Windows Installation CD .............................................. 295
Index ................................................................................................................................. 297
ENWW
xi
xii
ENWW
List of tables
Table 1-1 Software technical reference overview ...................................................................................... 1
Table 1-2 HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology features .......................................... 4
Table 1-3 Windows installation CD—(table 1 of 3) ................................................................................ 11
Table 1-4 Windows installation CD—(table 2 of 3) ................................................................................ 13
Table 1-5 Windows installation CD—(table 3 of 3) ................................................................................ 14
Table 1-6 CD documentation availability .............................................................................................. 17
Table 2-1 Drivers included with the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology
Windows CD ...................................................................................................................................... 38
Table 2-2 Availability of automatic discovery and driver configuration through bidirectional communication
in Windows Vista, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 .......................................... 40
Table 3-1 Default fonts ....................................................................................................................... 90
Table 3-2 Additional PS emulation fonts ................................................................................................ 92
Table 4-1 Printing Defaults, Printing Preferences, Document Properties ..................................................... 155
Table 5-1 HP PCL 6 driver custom paper sizes ................................................................................... 194
Table 5-2 Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks ............................................................. 208
Table 5-3 Page orientation ................................................................................................................ 212
Table 5-4 Driver mopier mode and collation settings ............................................................................. 246
Table 6-1 Adding a device in Macintosh operating systems ................................................................... 255
Table 7-1 Version Checking .............................................................................................................. 274
Table 7-2 Troubleshooting a firmware update ...................................................................................... 277
Table 7-3 Update messages .............................................................................................................. 277
Table 7-4 Troubleshooting a firmware update failure ............................................................................ 278
Table 7-5 HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology – Paper sources and
destinations ...................................................................................................................................... 289
Table 7-6 HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology – Paper-source commands ............ 289
Table 7-7 HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology – Supported paper sizes and
attributes .......................................................................................................................................... 290
Table 7-8 Supported paper types for each tray .................................................................................... 292
Table 7-9 HP PCL 6 driver custom paper sizes ................................................................................... 293
Table 7-10 HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology – Media-type commands ............ 294
ENWW
xiii
xiv
ENWW
List of figures
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
1-1 Windows installation CD documentation screen ...................................................................... 19
1-2 System Administrator's CD screen ........................................................................................ 22
1-3 System Administrator's CD User Documentation screen ............................................................ 23
1-4 System Administrator's CD Administrator Documentation screen ............................................... 26
2-1 Windows installation software CD Browser ............................................................................ 33
2-2 Documentation screen ......................................................................................................... 34
2-3 Optional Software screen .................................................................................................... 35
2-4 Update Now dialog box ..................................................................................................... 42
2-5 HP EWS – Device Status page ............................................................................................ 49
2-6 HP EWS – Configuration Page (1 of 2) ................................................................................. 50
2-7 HP EWS – Configuration Page (2 of 2) ................................................................................. 51
2-8 HP EWS – Supplies Status Page .......................................................................................... 52
2-9 HP EWS – Event Log Page .................................................................................................. 53
2-10 HP EWS – Usage Page (1 of 3) ......................................................................................... 54
2-11 HP EWS – Usage Page (2 of 3) ......................................................................................... 55
2-12 HP EWS – Usage Page (3 of 3) ......................................................................................... 56
2-13 HP EWS – Device Information page ................................................................................... 57
2-14 HP EWS – Control Panel Snapshot page ............................................................................. 58
2-15 HP EWS – Jam History Page ............................................................................................. 59
2-16 HP EWS – Print page ....................................................................................................... 60
2-17 HP EWS – Configure Device page ..................................................................................... 61
2-18 HP EWS – Notification Server page ................................................................................... 62
2-19 HP EWS – Alerts page ..................................................................................................... 63
2-20 HP EWS – AutoSend page ................................................................................................ 64
2-21 HP EWS – Security page .................................................................................................. 65
2-22 HP EWS – Device Security page ........................................................................................ 66
2-23 HP EWS – Restrict Color page ........................................................................................... 67
2-24 HP EWS – Edit Other Links page ....................................................................................... 67
2-25 HP EWS – Device Information page ................................................................................... 68
2-26 HP EWS – Language page ............................................................................................... 69
2-27 HP EWS – Date & Time page ............................................................................................ 70
2-28 HP EWS – Date &Time - Advanced page ............................................................................ 71
2-29 HP EWS – Sleep Schedule page ........................................................................................ 72
2-30 HP EWS – Backup and Restore page ................................................................................. 73
2-31 HP EWS – Solution Installer page ...................................................................................... 73
2-32 HP EWS – Address Book page (1 of 3) .............................................................................. 74
2-33 HP EWS – Address Book page (2 of 3) .............................................................................. 75
2-34 HP EWS – Address Book page (3 of 3) .............................................................................. 76
ENWW
xv
Figure 2-35 HP EWS – E-mail Setup page (1 of 2) ................................................................................. 77
Figure 2-36 HP EWS – E-mail Setup page (2 of 2) ................................................................................. 78
Figure 2-37 HP EWS – Network Folder Setup page ............................................................................... 79
Figure 2-38 HP EWS – Fax Send Setup page ....................................................................................... 80
Figure 2-39 HP EWS – Fax Activity Log page ....................................................................................... 81
Figure 2-40 HP EWS – Import Speed Dials page ................................................................................... 81
Figure 2-41 HP EWS Networking tab – Network Settings page ............................................................... 82
Figure 2-42 HP EWS Settings tab – Security page ................................................................................. 84
Figure 2-43 HP EWS home page in a password-protected system ............................................................ 85
Figure 2-44 HP EWS home page with an admin user logged in .............................................................. 86
Figure 3-1 Are you sure you want to cancel the installation? dialog box .................................................... 98
Figure 3-2 Cancel dialog box .............................................................................................................. 98
Figure 3-3 Setup Error – Unsupported Operating System, MS Windows 98 ............................................... 99
Figure 3-4 Welcome to the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Setup Wizard
dialog box ....................................................................................................................................... 100
Figure 3-5 Printer Connection dialog box ............................................................................................ 101
Figure 3-6 Firewall Detected dialog box (Windows XP) ......................................................................... 102
Figure 3-7 Disable Your Firewall dialog box (Windows Vista) ................................................................ 103
Figure 3-8 Searching dialog box ....................................................................................................... 104
Figure 3-9 Printer Not Found dialog box (Windows XP) ........................................................................ 105
Figure 3-10 Printer Not Found dialog box (Windows Vista) ................................................................... 106
Figure 3-11 Printers Found dialog box ................................................................................................ 107
Figure 3-12 Printer Found dialog box ................................................................................................. 108
Figure 3-13 Confirm Network Settings dialog box ................................................................................ 109
Figure 3-14 Confirm Changing Setting dialog box ............................................................................... 110
Figure 3-15 Change TCP/IP Settings dialog box .................................................................................. 111
Figure 3-16 Check Printer Connection dialog box ................................................................................ 112
Figure 3-17 Specify Printer dialog box ................................................................................................ 113
Figure 3-18 Printer Settings dialog box ............................................................................................... 114
Figure 3-19 Set Port Name dialog box ............................................................................................... 115
Figure 3-20 Model dialog box ........................................................................................................... 116
Figure 3-21 Installation Type dialog box ............................................................................................. 117
Figure 3-22 Installation typeDetails dialog box ..................................................................................... 118
Figure 3-23 Feature Selection dialog box ............................................................................................ 119
Figure 3-24 Details dialog box .......................................................................................................... 120
Figure 3-25 Ready to Install dialog box ............................................................................................... 121
Figure 3-26 Printer Properties General tab ........................................................................................... 122
Figure 3-27 Installation Status dialog box ............................................................................................ 123
Figure 3-28 Finish dialog box (Windows XP) ....................................................................................... 124
Figure 3-29 Finish dialog box (Windows Vista) .................................................................................... 125
Figure 3-30 HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Next Steps — Congratulations
dialog box ....................................................................................................................................... 126
Figure 3-31 Test Page dialog box ...................................................................................................... 126
Figure 3-32 Setup Maintenance dialog box ......................................................................................... 127
Figure 3-33 Ready to Remove dialog box ............................................................................................ 128
Figure 3-34 Uninstallation Finish dialog box ........................................................................................ 129
Figure 3-35 Welcome to the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Installation
Customization Wizard dialog box ....................................................................................................... 131
xvi
ENWW
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
3-36 Software License Agreement dialog box ............................................................................ 132
3-37 Language dialog box ...................................................................................................... 133
3-38 Printer Port dialog box ..................................................................................................... 134
3-39 Browse for Printer dialog box ........................................................................................... 134
3-40 Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box ......................................................................................... 135
3-41 Port Creation Options dialog box ..................................................................................... 136
3-42 Please enter a Hardware address.: Network Setup Error dialog box ...................................... 136
3-43 Model dialog box ........................................................................................................... 137
3-44 Drivers dialog box .......................................................................................................... 138
3-45 Driver Details dialog box ................................................................................................. 139
3-46 Driver Configuration dialog box ....................................................................................... 140
3-47 Printing Preferences tab ................................................................................................... 141
3-48 Device Settings tab ......................................................................................................... 141
3-49 Invalid Selection dialog box ............................................................................................. 142
3-50 Additional Software dialog box ........................................................................................ 142
3-51 Additional software Details dialog box .............................................................................. 143
3-52 Custom Installer Location dialog box ................................................................................. 144
3-53 Ready to Create Installer dialog box ................................................................................. 145
3-54 Printer Properties General tab ........................................................................................... 146
3-55 Installing dialog box ....................................................................................................... 147
3-56 Finish dialog box ............................................................................................................ 148
4-1 Device Settings tab ........................................................................................................... 162
4-2 About tab ........................................................................................................................ 163
4-3 Advanced tab .................................................................................................................. 166
4-4 Paper/Quality tab ............................................................................................................ 168
4-5 Services tab ..................................................................................................................... 171
5-1 An Incompatible Print Settings message ............................................................................... 179
5-2 Advanced tab .................................................................................................................. 181
5-3 Printing Shortcuts tab ....................................................................................................... 188
5-4 Printing shortcuts box ........................................................................................................ 189
5-5 Paper/Quality tab ........................................................................................................... 191
5-6 Paper Options group box ................................................................................................. 192
5-7 Custom Paper Size dialog box .......................................................................................... 193
5-8 Covers dialog box ............................................................................................................ 197
5-9 Print pages on different paper dialog box ............................................................................ 197
5-10 Insert blank or preprinted sheets dialog box ....................................................................... 198
5-11 Chapter separator pages dialog box ................................................................................. 198
5-12 Document preview image ................................................................................................ 199
5-13 Color Quality group box ................................................................................................. 199
5-14 HP real life technologies options ....................................................................................... 200
5-15 Effects tab ..................................................................................................................... 202
5-16 Preview images – Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right) ..................................... 204
5-17 Document preview image ................................................................................................ 205
5-18 Watermark Details dialog box ......................................................................................... 206
5-19 Finishing tab .................................................................................................................. 210
5-20 Page-order preview images ............................................................................................. 214
5-21 Document preview image ................................................................................................ 214
5-22 Output tab ..................................................................................................................... 217
ENWW
xvii
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
xviii
5-23 Image Shift dialog box .................................................................................................... 219
5-24 Document preview image ................................................................................................ 219
5-25 Job Storage tab .............................................................................................................. 222
5-26 Color tab ...................................................................................................................... 229
5-27 Advanced Color Settings screen ...................................................................................... 230
5-28 Document preview image ................................................................................................ 232
5-29 Services tab ................................................................................................................... 234
5-30 HP PCL 6 driver Device Settings tab ................................................................................ 236
5-31 PS Emulation driver Device Settings tab ............................................................................ 237
5-32 Font Substitution Table .................................................................................................... 239
5-33 HP Font Installer dialog box ............................................................................................. 240
5-34 About tab ...................................................................................................................... 248
6-1 HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology CD-ROM icon ............................ 255
6-2 HP CM8060/CM8050 MFP screen .................................................................................... 255
6-3 Authenticate dialog .......................................................................................................... 256
6-4 HP Macintosh installer introduction dialog ........................................................................... 256
6-5 HP Installer Read Me dialog ............................................................................................... 257
6-6 License dialog .................................................................................................................. 257
6-7 Agree dialog ................................................................................................................... 258
6-8 Easy Install dialog ............................................................................................................ 258
6-9 Installing dialog ............................................................................................................... 259
6-10 Finish Up dialog ............................................................................................................. 259
6-11 Printer list screen ............................................................................................................. 261
6-12 Print & Fax dialog ........................................................................................................... 261
6-13 Default Browser tab ........................................................................................................ 262
6-14 Printer Browser – IP Printer tab .......................................................................................... 263
6-15 Installable Options screen ................................................................................................ 264
6-16 Printer List screen ............................................................................................................ 264
6-17 Printer List screen ............................................................................................................ 265
6-18 Print & Fax screen ........................................................................................................... 265
6-19 Add printer screen .......................................................................................................... 266
6-20 Installable Options screen ................................................................................................ 268
6-21 Printer List screen ............................................................................................................ 268
6-22 Add printer screen .......................................................................................................... 269
6-23 Installable Options screen ................................................................................................ 270
ENWW
1
Purpose and scope
Introduction
This software technical reference (STR) provides information and troubleshooting tips for the HP
CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology printing-system software.
This STR (part number C5956–90412) is prepared in an electronic format to serve as a quickreference tool for system administrators, support engineers, management information systems (MIS)
personnel, and HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology end users, as appropriate.
The following information is included in this STR:
●
Descriptions of print drivers, environments and operating systems, and system modifications
●
Procedures for installing and uninstalling the printing-system software components
●
Descriptions of various HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology topics,
including engineering details
The following table describes the structure of this STR.
Table 1-1  Software technical reference overview
Chapter
Content
Chapter 1, Purpose and scope
This chapter contains basic information about the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color
MFP with Edgeline Technology and its software:
●
Overview of the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology
●
Printing-system software overview, including the following topics:
●
Chapter 2, Software description
ENWW
●
System requirements
●
Operating-system support
●
Availability
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology software
documentation
This chapter provides an overview of the printing-system software installer and
print drivers.
Introduction
1
Table 1-1  Software technical reference overview (continued)
Chapter
Content
This chapter also contains general information about other software features,
including the following topics:
Chapter 3, Install MS Windows printingsystem components
●
Driver configuration for Microsoft® (MS) Windows®
●
HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool
●
HP Embedded Web Server
●
HP Web Jetadmin
This chapter provides instructions for installing the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color
MFP with Edgeline Technology in MS Windows operating systems by using
various installation methods. These methods and additional topics include the
following:
●
Font support
●
Print-driver installation instructions:
●
Install from the printing-system CD
●
Install from a network or from downloaded files
●
Modify a pre-existing installation
●
Install through a USB port
●
Install by using the Add Printer Wizard
●
Use the Installer Customization Wizard
●
Set a default printer
●
HP MFP Send Fax driver installation instructions
Chapter 4, HP MFP Send Fax driver
This chapter provides detailed descriptions of the HP MFP Send Fax driver.
Chapter 5, HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and
PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
This chapter provides detailed descriptions of the HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and
PS Emulation drivers for Windows Vista, Windows XP,
Windows Server 2003, and Windows 2000.
Chapter 6, Macintosh
This chapter provides instructions for installing and uninstalling the HP CM8060/
CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology in Macintosh operating systems.
Chapter 7, Engineering details
This chapter contains information about the following special topics:
●
Remote firmware updates
●
Print print-ready documents
●
Paper attributes
●
Create an output file
●
Uninstall
For information about the location of information within chapters, see the table of contents. An index is
also provided in this STR.
Topics:
2
Chapter 1   Purpose and scope
ENWW
ENWW
●
Device features
●
Printing-system software
●
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology documentation
Introduction
3
Device features
The following table contains descriptions of features that are available for the HP CM8060/CM8050
Color MFP with Edgeline Technology. Device configurations might vary among countries/regions.
Table 1-2  HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology features
Models
Memory
User interface
Supported printer personalities
Job-storage features
Environmental features
4
Chapter 1   Purpose and scope
●
HP CM8060 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology (part
number C5957A)
●
HP CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology (part
number C5958A)
●
Standard 1024 megabytes (MB) of random-access
memory (RAM). This is the maximum memory for the
device
●
80 gigabyte (GB) embedded hard disk
●
HP Easy Select control panel provides access to all
features
●
Adjustable backlight
●
Numeric keypad plus five job-control hard keys
●
Sleep button to put the device into an energy-saving
Sleep mode
●
On/off button on the control panel
●
HP PCL 6
●
HP PCL 5
●
PostScript® (PS) 3 emulation
●
Portable-document format (PDF)
●
Job-storage features:
●
Off
●
Proof and hold
●
Personal jobs
●
Quick Copy
●
Stored Job
●
Personal-identification number (PIN) printing
●
Sleep-mode setting
●
High content of recyclable components and materials
●
Energy Star® compliant
●
Restrictions of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive
compliant
●
Blue Angel
ENWW
Table 1-2  HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology features (continued)
Optional accessories
●
Disposal of Waste Equipment by Users in Private
Household in the European Union (WEEE)
●
508 Compliance
●
HP 4000-Sheet Input Tray (Tray 5)
●
HP Multifunction Finisher
●
HP 4-Bin Job Separator
●
HP Analog Fax Accessory
NOTE: For a complete list of accessories and
part numbers, see the HP CM8060/CM8050
Color MFP with Edgeline Technology System
Administrator Guide, which is available on the
System Administrator's CD.
Connectivity
ENWW
●
Local area network (LAN) (RJ-45)
●
Hi-Speed USB universal serial bus 2.0 cable interface
●
Host USB (MS Windows only)
●
Enhanced input/output (EIO) slot for adding an HP
Jetdirect print server, a parallel port, or other accessories
●
Foreign interface harness (FIH) connector
Device features
5
Printing-system software
Topics:
●
System requirements
●
Operating-system support
●
Availability
System requirements
The following operating systems support the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline
Technology printing-system software:
●
Windows
●
Macintosh
●
Linux
●
UNIX
Windows
System requirements for 32-bit operating systems
●
Pentium® or compatible processor
●
CD-ROM or DVD drive, or Web connection
●
220 MB of available hard-disk space
●
Network connection, or USB port (USB 1.1 or 2.0)
●
Windows Vista: 1–GHz processor with 512 MB RAM
●
Windows XP: 333-MHz processor with 128 MB RAM
●
Windows Server 2003: 550-MHz processor with 128 MB RAM
●
Windows 2000: 133-MHz processor with 64 MB RAM
System requirements for 64-bit operating systems
6
●
Pentium® or compatible processor
●
CD-ROM or DVD drive, or Web connection
●
220 MB of available hard-disk space
●
Network connection, or USB port (USB 1.1 or 2.0)
●
Windows Vista 64–Bit Edition: 800 MHz processor with 512 MB RAM
●
Windows XP 64–Bit Edition: 333-MHz processor with 512 MB RAM
●
Windows Server 2003 64–Bit Edition: 550-MHz processor with 512 MB RAM
Chapter 1   Purpose and scope
ENWW
Macintosh
For information about Macintosh support for the device, see Macintosh on page 249 in this STR.
Linux
For information about Linux support for the device, see the following HP Linux Web site:
www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting
UNIX
For information about UNIX® support for the device, see the following Web sites:
●
www.hp.com/go/jetdirectunix_software
●
www.hp.com/go/unixmodelscripts
Operating-system support
MS Windows operating systems provide full-featured support for the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color
MFP with Edgeline Technology. Operating systems that are not described in this STR provide varying
levels of functionality.
Throughout this STR, MS Windows XP is used to denote Windows XP Professional and Windows XP
Home Edition, unless noted otherwise. Information about MS Windows XP also applies to MS
Windows Server 2003, unless noted otherwise.
Information relating to networking functions is specific to devices that have network capabilities.
The HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology software has not been tested with
and is not supported in the following operating systems:
●
MS Windows 3.1x
●
MS Windows 95
●
MS Windows 98
●
MS Windows Millennium Edition (Me)
●
MS Windows NT® 4.0
●
IA-64-bit operating systems
Print drivers for these operating systems are not included on the printing-system installation CDs and
are not available on the Web. Other drivers that are installed in these non-supported operating
systems might work for the device, but some print-driver features and functions might not be available.
For more information about the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology, go to
one of the following Web sites:
●
www.hp.com/support/CM8060edgeline
●
www.hp.com/support/CM8050edgeline
Topics:
ENWW
Printing-system software
7
●
Standalone drivers
●
Print driver support in other operating systems
Standalone drivers
The following operating systems support the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline
Technology printing-system software, including the HP PCL 6, PCL 5, PS Emulation drivers, the HP
MFP Send Fax driver, and the HP Universal Print Drivers (available on the Web only):
●
Windows Vista (32-bit and 64-bit)
●
Windows XP Professional (Service pack 1 and later; 32-bit and 64-bit)
●
Windows XP Home Edition (32-bit)
●
Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit)
●
Windows 2000 (Service pack 4 recommended)
Print driver support in other operating systems
The HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology is also supported in the following
operating systems:
●
Mac OS X (V10.2.8, V10.3.9, V10.4 and later). See Macintosh on page 249 in this STR for
more information.
●
MS Windows Terminal Server
●
Citrix Terminal Server. For more information, go to the following Web site:
h20000.ww2.hp.com/bizsupport/TechSupport/Document.jsp
Alternatively, go to the HP.com Web site and search for “c00213455”.
●
MS Windows Cluster Server 8
●
HP OpenVMS. For more information, go to the following Web site:
h71000.www7.hp.com/openvms/print/
●
Tru64 UNIX printing. For more information, go to the following Web site:
h30097.www3.hp.com/printing/
●
SAP printing. For more information, go to the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/sap/print
●
HP Install Network Printer Wizard (INPW). Available only at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/inpw_software
Availability
Download the printing-system software from the Web, or order it on a CD from HP fulfillment centers.
8
Chapter 1   Purpose and scope
ENWW
NOTE: This STR describes drivers that are shipped on the printing-system software installation
CDs. This STR does not describe any drivers that might be released by support personnel.
Topics:
●
Printing-system software on the Web
●
In-box printing-system software CDs
Printing-system software on the Web
All software that is contained on the printing-system installation CDs is also available on the Web.
Web deployment is the preferred method for obtaining the latest software. The HP Web sites offer an
option for automatic e-mail notification of new software releases.
The HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology printing-system software is available
for download at the following Web sites:
www.hp.com/go/CM8060edgeline_sw
www.hp.com/go/CM8050edgeline_sw
In-box printing-system software CDs
The printing-system installation CDs for the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline
Technology contain a variety of files for installing the printing-system software on the computer.
Three CDs are included with the device:
●
Windows (part number: C5956–61403). Contains the printer-driver installer for Windows
operating systems, user documentation, the Installer Customization Wizard, and links to the
HP Universal Print Drivers (UPD) on the Web.
●
Macintosh (part number: C5956–61105). Contains the printer-driver installer for
Macintosh operating systems and user documentation.
●
System Administrator's CD (part number: C5956–61404). Contains user
documentation and administrator documentation.
Each printing-system installation CD includes the necessary software and files to install and uninstall the
printing-system components.
Documentation in languages that are not included on the CDs (CR = Croatian, RO = Romanian, SL =
Slovenian) is available at the following Web sites:
www.hp.com/support/CM8060edgeline
www.hp.com/support/CM8050edgeline
Topics:
ENWW
●
Windows installation CD
●
Windows installation CD languages
Printing-system software
9
Windows installation CD
The root directory in the MS Windows printing-system installation CD contains the AUTORUN.EXE file,
the SETUP.EXE file, support files, and the following directories:
●
Autorun
●
Drivers
●
Fonts
●
HP TCP Port Monitor
●
Inst Eng
●
Manuals
The printing-system files for each language reside in the following directories:
●
Drivers
●
Manuals
To view the files:
1.
Insert the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Windows installation CD
into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
Right-click Start.
3.
Click Explore, and then select the CD-ROM drive.
Windows installation CD languages
The HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Windows installation CD contains
printing-system software in the following languages:
●
10
Windows installation CD (part number C5956–61104):
●
AR = Arabic
●
CA = Catalan (Català)
●
CS = Czech (Cesky)
●
DA = Danish (Dansk)
●
DE = German (Deutsch)
●
EL = Greek
●
EN = English
●
ES = Spanish (Español)
●
FI = Finnish (Suomi)
●
FR = French (Français)
●
HE = Hebrew
Chapter 1   Purpose and scope
ENWW
●
HU = Hungarian (Magyar)
●
ID = Indonesia (Bahasa)
●
IT = Italian (Italiano)
●
JA = Japanese
●
KO = Korean
●
NL = Dutch (Nederland)
●
NO = Norwegian (Norsk)
●
PL = Polish (Polski)
●
PT = Brazilian Portuguese (Português)
●
RU = Russian (Russ)
●
SK = Slovak
●
SV = Swedish (Svenska)
●
TH = Thai
●
TR = Turkish (Turkçe)
●
ZHCN = Simplified Chinese
●
ZHTW = Traditional Chinese
The following tables list the Windows printing-system software components that are supported in each
language.
Table 1-3  Windows installation CD—(table 1 of 3)
ENWW
Component
AR
CA
CS
DA
DE
EL
EN
ES
FI
HP MFP Send Fax
driver
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP PCL 6 driver:
32-bit, 64-bit
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP PCL 5 driver:
32-bit, 64-bit
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
PS Emulation
driver: 32-bit, 64-bit
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP PCL 5
x
Universal print driver
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP PS Emulation
Universal driver
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Common MS
Windows Installer
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Add Printer Wizard
Installer
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Printing-system software
11
Table 1-3  Windows installation CD—(table 1 of 3) (continued)
12
Component
AR
CA
CS
DA
DE
EL
EN
ES
FI
Installer
Customization
Wizard
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
CD Browser
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Fonts
 
 
x
x
x
 
x
 
x
HP CM8060/
CM8050 Color
MFP with Edgeline
Technology Quick
Reference Guide
(.PDF file)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP CM8060/
CM8050 Color
MFP with Edgeline
Technology Quick
Reference Guide
(.CHM file)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP CM8060/
CM8050 Color
MFP with Edgeline
Technology System
Administrator Guide
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP CM8060/
CM8050 Color
MFP with Edgeline
Technology
Software Technical
Reference
 
 
 
 
 
 
x
 
 
HP Jetdirect
Administrator's
Guide (.PDF file)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Jetdirect
Administrator's
Guide (.CHM file)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Driver
Preconfiguration
Support Guide
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Installer
Customization
Wizard
Administrator's
Guide
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Hewlett-Packard
CM8060/
CM8050 Color
MFP with Edgeline
Technology Printingsystem Install Notes
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP CM8060/
CM8050 Color
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Chapter 1   Purpose and scope
ENWW
Component
AR
CA
CS
DA
DE
EL
EN
ES
FI
MFP with Edgeline
Technology Use the
Control Panel
Table 1-4  Windows installation CD—(table 2 of 3)
ENWW
Component
FR
HE
HU
ID
IT
JA
KO
NL
NO
HP MFP Send Fax
driver
x
x
x
 
x
x
x
x
x
HP PCL 6 driver:
32-bit, 64-bit
x
x
x
 
x
x
x
x
x
HP PCL 5 driver:
32-bit, 64-bit
x
x
x
 
x
x
x
x
x
PS Emulation
driver: 32-bit, 64-bit
x
x
x
 
x
x
x
x
x
HP PCL 5
Universal print
driver
x
x
x
 
x
x
x
x
x
HP PS Emulation
Universal driver
x
x
x
 
x
x
x
x
x
Common MS
Windows Installer
x
x
x
 
x
x
x
x
x
Add Printer Wizard
Installer
x
x
x
 
x
x
x
x
x
Installer
Customization
Wizard
x
x
x
 
x
x
x
x
x
CD Browser
x
x
x
 
x
x
x
x
x
Fonts
x
 
x
 
 
 
 
x
x
HP CM8060/
CM8050 Color
MFP with Edgeline
Technology Quick
Reference Guide
(.PDF file)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP CM8060/
CM8050 Color
MFP with Edgeline
Technology Quick
Reference Guide
(.CHM file)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP CM8060/
CM8050 Color
MFP with Edgeline
Technology System
Administrator Guide
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Printing-system software
13
Table 1-4  Windows installation CD—(table 2 of 3) (continued)
Component
FR
HE
HU
ID
IT
JA
KO
NL
NO
HP CM8060/
CM8050 Color
MFP with Edgeline
Technology
Software Technical
Reference
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
HP Jetdirect
Administrator's
Guide (.PDF file)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Jetdirect
Administrator's
Guide (.CHM file)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Driver
Preconfiguration
Support Guide
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Installer
Customization
Wizard
Administrator's
Guide
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Hewlett-Packard
CM8060/
CM8050 Color
MFP with Edgeline
Technology Printingsystem Install Notes
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP CM8060/
CM8050 Color
MFP with Edgeline
Technology Use the
Control Panel
x
x
x
 
x
 
 
x
x
Table 1-5  Windows installation CD—(table 3 of 3)
14
Component
PL
PT
RU
SK
SV
TH
TR
ZHCN
ZHTW
HP MFP Send Fax
driver
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP PCL 6 driver:
32-bit, 64-bit
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP PCL 5 driver:
32-bit, 64-bit
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
PS Emulation
x
driver: 32-bit, 64-bit
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP PCL 5
Universal print
driver
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP PS Emulation
Universal driver
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Chapter 1   Purpose and scope
ENWW
Table 1-5  Windows installation CD—(table 3 of 3) (continued)
ENWW
Component
PL
PT
RU
SK
SV
TH
TR
ZHCN
ZHTW
Common MS
Windows Installer
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Add Printer
Wizard Installer
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Installer
Customization
Wizard
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
CD Browser
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Fonts
x
x
x
x
 
 
x
x
x
HP CM8060/
CM8050 Color
MFP with Edgeline
Technology Quick
Reference Guide
(.PDF file)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP CM8060/
CM8050 Color
MFP with Edgeline
Technology Quick
Reference Guide
(.CHM file)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP CM8060/
x
CM8050 Color
MFP with Edgeline
Technology System
Administrator Guide
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP CM8060/
CM8050 Color
MFP with Edgeline
Technology
Software Technical
Reference
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
HP Jetdirect
Administrator's
Guide (.PDF file)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Jetdirect
Administrator's
Guide (.CHM file)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
HP Driver
Preconfiguration
Support Guide
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Installer
Customization
Wizard
Administrator's
Guide
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Hewlett-Packard
CM8060/
CM8050 Color
MFP with Edgeline
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Printing-system software
15
Table 1-5  Windows installation CD—(table 3 of 3) (continued)
Component
PL
PT
RU
SK
SV
TH
TR
ZHCN
ZHTW
x
x
x
x
x
 
x
 
 
Technology Printingsystem Install Notes
HP CM8060/
CM8050 Color
MFP with Edgeline
Technology Use
the Control Panel
16
Chapter 1   Purpose and scope
ENWW
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline
Technology documentation
All three CDs that are included with the device contain documentation.
Documentation in languages that are not included on the CDs (CR = Croatian, RO = Romanian, SL =
Slovenian) is available at the following Web sites:
www.hp.com/support/CM8060edgeline
www.hp.com/support/CM8050edgeline
Access to the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology documents depends on the
document type and location:
●
Some documents can be opened from the CD Browser.
●
Some documents appear on the software CD and can only be opened by navigating to the folder
where they reside.
●
Some documents are available on the Web through links in the CD Browser or CD folders.
Documents are available in the following file formats:
●
Portable document Format (.PDF). The HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline
Technology printing-system software CD includes Adobe® Acrobat® Reader for viewing
documentation that is opened from the CD Browser. To view documentation that is opened by
navigating to the folder where they reside, Adobe Acrobat Reader must be installed on the
computer. Adobe Acrobat Reader is available at the following Web site:
www.adobe.com
●
Compiled HTML (.CHM, Windows only). When you click a documentation link to a .CHM
document, a Microsoft HTML Viewer opens the file on the computer screen.
●
Hypertext markup (.HTM). When you click a documentation link to an .HTM document, a
Web browser opens the file on the computer screen.
The following table lists the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology documents
that are available for each operating system.
Table 1-6  CD documentation availability
ENWW
Document
Windows CD
Macintosh
CD
System
Administrator's
CD (Windows/
Mac)
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Quick
Reference Guide (.CHM and .PDF)
x
x
x
Hewlett-Packard CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline
Technology Printing-system Install Notes
x
 
x
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Use
the Control Panel
x
x
x
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology System
Administrator Guide
 
 
x
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology documentation
17
Table 1-6  CD documentation availability (continued)
Document
Windows CD
Macintosh
CD
System
Administrator's
CD (Windows/
Mac)
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology
Software Technical Reference
 
 
x1
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide (.CHM and .PDF)
 
 
x
HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide
 
 
x
Installer Customization Wizard Administrator's Guide
 
 
x
1
The HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Software Technical Reference (part number C5956–
90412) is available on the Web at www.hp.com/support/CM8060edgeline, or by accessing the System Administrator's CD
and clicking on the Software Technical Reference button that will redirect you to the URL.
Topics:
●
Windows installation CD
●
Macintosh installation CD
●
System Administrator's CD
Windows installation CD
On the main screen of the Windows printing-system software CD Browser, click User
Documentation to open the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology
documentation screen, as shown in the following figure. Move the cursor over each option to see a
description of the option in the right panel.
18
Chapter 1   Purpose and scope
ENWW
Figure 1-1  Windows installation CD documentation screen
Topics:
●
Hewlett-Packard CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Printing-system Install
Notes
●
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Quick Reference Guide
●
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Use the Control Panel (PDF Poster)
Hewlett-Packard CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology
Printing-system Install Notes
The Hewlett-Packard CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Printing-system Install
Notes (in .HTM format) contains important information about device features, instructions for installing
the printing-system software, and technical assistance.
View this guide from the Windows software CD:
ENWW
1.
On the main screen of the Windows installation CD Browser, click User Documentation.
2.
Click Install Notes.
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology documentation
19
Gain access to the file:
1.
Insert the Windows software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3.
Open the following file:
HPCM80X0_INSTALLNOTE_XXWW.HTM
NOTE: The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. For French, the file name is
HPCM80X0_INSTALLNOTE_FRWW.HTM.
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Quick Reference
Guide
The HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Quick Reference Guide describes
device operation and maintenance.
View this guide from the Windows software CD:
1.
On the main screen of the Windows installation CD Browser, click User Documentation.
2.
Click Quick Reference Guide.
The guide opens as an MS Windows Help file (.CHM file). This readable, onscreen version of the
guide is provided in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
Gain access to the file:
1.
Insert the Windows software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3.
Open the following file:
HPCM80X0_QUICKREF_XXWW.CHM
NOTE: The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. For French, the file name is
HPCM80X0_QUICK_REF_FRWW.CHM.
The HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Quick Reference Guide is also
provided as a printable .PDF file. Print the guide:
1.
On the main screen of the Windows installation CD Browser, click User Documentation.
2.
Click Printable Quick Reference Guide to open the guide.
3.
Print the guide.
Gain access to the file:
20
Chapter 1   Purpose and scope
ENWW
NOTE: To view documentation that is opened by navigating to the folder where they reside,
Adobe Acrobat Reader must be installed on the computer. Adobe Acrobat Reader is available
at the following Web site:
www.adobe.com
1.
Insert the Windows software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3.
Open the following file:
HPCM80X0_QUICK_REF_XXWW.PDF
NOTE: The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. For French, the file name is
HPCM80X0_QUICK_REF_FRWW.PDF.
When the file is open, click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to another location.
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Use the Control
Panel (PDF Poster)
The HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Use the Control Panel is a graphical
guide that provides information about using the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline
Technology control panel.
View this guide from the Windows software CD:
1.
On the main screen of the Windows installation CD Browser, click User Documentation.
2.
Click Use the Control Panel (PDF Poster).
Gain access to the file:
NOTE: To view documentation that is opened by navigating to the folder where they reside,
Adobe Acrobat Reader must be installed on the computer. Adobe Acrobat Reader is available
at the following Web site:
www.adobe.com
1.
Insert the Windows software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3.
Open the following file:
HPCM80X0_POSTER_XXWW.PDF
NOTE: The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. For French, the file name is
HPCM80X0_POSTER_FRWW.PDF.
Macintosh installation CD
For information about documentation on the Macintosh installation CD, see Macintosh on page 249 in
this STR.
ENWW
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology documentation
21
System Administrator's CD
To view the documentation on the System Administrator's CD, insert the CD into the CD-ROM drive.
The System Administrator's CD contains user documentation and system administrator documentation
for Windows and Macintosh operating systems.
Figure 1-2   System Administrator's CD screen
Topics:
●
User Documentation
●
Administrator Documentation
User Documentation
On the main screen of the System Administrator's CD Browser, click User Documentation to open
the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology user documentation screen, as shown
in the following figure. Move the cursor over each option to see a description of the option in the right
panel.
22
Chapter 1   Purpose and scope
ENWW
Figure 1-3  System Administrator's CD User Documentation screen
Topics:
●
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Quick Reference Guide
●
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Use the Control Panel (PDF Poster)
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Quick Reference Guide
The HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Quick Reference Guide describes
device operation and maintenance.
View this guide from the System Administrator's software CD:
1.
On the main screen of the System Administrator's CD Browser, click User Documentation.
2.
Click Quick Reference Guide.
The guide opens as an MS Windows Help file (.CHM file). This readable, onscreen version of the
guide is provided in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
ENWW
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology documentation
23
Gain access to the file:
1.
Insert the System Administrator's software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3.
Open the following file:
HPCM80X0_QUICKREF_XXWW.CHM
NOTE: The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. For French, the file name is
HPCM80X0_QUICKREF_FRWW.CHM.
The HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Quick Reference Guide is also
provided as a printable .PDF file. Print the guide:
1.
On the main screen of the System Administrator's CD Browser, click User Documentation.
2.
Click Printable Quick Reference Guide to open the guide.
3.
Print the guide.
Gain access to the file:
NOTE: To view documentation that is opened by navigating to the folder where they reside,
Adobe Acrobat Reader must be installed on the computer. Adobe Acrobat Reader is available
at the following Web site:
www.adobe.com
1.
Insert the System Administrator's CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3.
Open the following file:
HPCM80X0_QUICKREF_XXWW.PDF
NOTE: The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. For French, the file name is
HPCM80X0_QUICKREF_FRWW.PDF.
When the file is open, click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to another location.
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Use the Control Panel (PDF Poster)
The HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Use the Control Panel is a graphical
guide that provides information about using the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline
Technology control panel.
View this guide from the Windows software CD:
1.
On the main screen of the System Administrator's CD Browser, click User Documentation.
2.
Click Use the Control Panel (PDF Poster).
Gain access to the file:
24
Chapter 1   Purpose and scope
ENWW
NOTE: To view documentation that is opened by navigating to the folder where they reside,
Adobe Acrobat Reader must be installed on the computer. Adobe Acrobat Reader is available
at the following Web site:
www.adobe.com
1.
Insert the System Administrator's software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3.
Open the following file:
HPCM80X0_POSTER_XXWW.PDF
NOTE: The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. In French, the file name is
HPCM80X0_POSTER_FRWW.PDF.
Administrator Documentation
On the main screen of the System Administrator's CD Browser, click Administrator
Documentation to open the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology
administrator documentation screen, as shown in the following figure. Move the cursor over each
option to see a description of the option in the right panel.
ENWW
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology documentation
25
Figure 1-4   System Administrator's CD Administrator Documentation screen
Topics:
●
Hewlett-Packard CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Printing-system Install
Notes
●
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide
●
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology System Administrator Guide
●
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology System Software Technical Reference
●
HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide
●
Installer Customization Wizard Administrator's Guide
Hewlett-Packard CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Printing-system
Install Notes
The Hewlett-Packard CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Printing-system Install
Notes (in .HTM format) contains important information about device features, instructions for installing
the printing-system software, and technical assistance.
26
Chapter 1   Purpose and scope
ENWW
View this guide from the System Administrator's software CD:
1.
On the main screen of the System Administrator's CD Browser, click Administrator
Documentation.
2.
Click Install Notes.
Gain access to the file:
1.
Insert the System Administrator's CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3.
Open the following file:
HPCM80X0_INSTALLNOTE_XXWW.HTM
NOTE: The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. For French, the file name is
HPCM80X0_INSTALLNOTE_FRWW.HTM.
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide
The HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide is a network administrator guide (in .CHM and .PDF format)
that contains information about connecting the device directly to a network.
View this guide from the System Administrator's CD:
1.
On the main screen of the System Administrator's CD Browser, click Administrator
Documentation.
2.
Click HP Jetdirect Guide.
Gain access to the file:
NOTE: To view documentation that is opened by navigating to the folder where they reside,
Adobe Acrobat Reader must be installed on the computer. Adobe Acrobat Reader is available
at the following Web site:
www.adobe.com
1.
Insert the System Administrator's CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3.
Open the following file:
HPJDIAG_XXWW.PDF
NOTE: The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. For French, the file name is
HPJDIAG_FRWW.PDF.
When the file is open, click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to another location.
The guide can also be accessed as an MS Windows Help file (.CHM file). This readable, onscreen
version of the guide is provided in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
ENWW
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology documentation
27
Gain access to the .CHM file:
1.
Insert the System Administrator's CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3.
Open the following file:
HPJDIAG_XXWW.CHM
NOTE: The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. For French, the file name is
HPJDIAG__FRWW.CHM.
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology System Administrator Guide
This guide provides information about product operation, troubleshooting, warranty and specifications,
supplies, and support.
View this guide from the System Administrator's CD:
1.
On the main screen of the System Administrator's CD Browser, click Administrator
Documentation.
2.
Click System Administrator Guide.
Gain access to the file:
1.
Insert the System Administrator's CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3.
Open the following file:
HPCM80X0_SYSADMIN_XXWW.HTM
NOTE: The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. For French, the file name is
HPCM80X0_SYSADMIN_FRWW.HTM.
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology System Software Technical Reference
This guide provides information about and troubleshooting tips for the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color
MFP with Edgeline Technology printing-system software.
View this guide from the System Administrator's CD:
28
1.
On the main screen of the System Administrator's CD Browser, click Administrator
Documentation.
2.
Click Software Technical Reference Guide.
3.
To be redirected to support, click on the following Web site: www.hp.com/support/
CM8060edgeline.
Chapter 1   Purpose and scope
ENWW
Gain access to the file:
1.
Insert the System Administrator's CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3.
Open the following file:
HPCM80X0_SOFTTECHREF_XXWW.HTM
NOTE: The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. For French, the file name is
HPCM80X0_SOFTTECHREF_FRWW.HTM.
HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide
The HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide contains important information about preconfiguring
printing-system drivers before installation in network environments.
View this guide from the System Administrator's CD:
1.
On the main screen of the System Administrator's CD Browser, click Administrator
Documentation.
2.
Click HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide.
Gain access to the file:
NOTE: To view documentation that is opened by navigating to the folder where they reside,
Adobe Acrobat Reader must be installed on the computer. Adobe Acrobat Reader is available
at the following Web site:
www.adobe.com
1.
Insert the System Administrator's CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3.
Open the following file:
PRECONFIG_SUPPORT_XXWW.PDF
NOTE: The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. For French, the file name is
PRECONFIG_SUPPORT_FRWW.PDF.
When the file is open, click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to another location.
Installer Customization Wizard Administrator's Guide
The printing-system Installer Customization Wizard enables a system administrator to change the
installer defaults after the print-driver installation package has been created using the customization
wizard. This allows a system administrator to use a single distribution package and preset options for
installation in a response file that is unique for the target user. The customized installer is then ready for
installation by end users.
The Installer Customization Wizard Administrator's Guide describes the basic files needed to
customize the distribution package and initiate the installation.
ENWW
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology documentation
29
NOTE: The Installer Customization Wizard Administrator's Guide assumes that the user
understands XML formatting and has the proper tools to create and modify XML files.
Gain access to the file:
1.
Insert the System Administrator's software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
Navigate to the Manuals\<language> folder.
3.
Open the following file:
HPCM80X0_CUSTINSTALL_XXWW.HTM
NOTE: The "XX" in the file name corresponds to the language. For French, the file name is
HPCM80X0_CUSTINSTALL_FRWW.HTM
30
Chapter 1   Purpose and scope
ENWW
2
Software description
Introduction
The HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology comes with software and installers
for MS Windows and Apple Computer, Inc., Macintosh systems. Linux and UNIX systems also support
the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology, and software is available on the
Web. For information about specific system installers, print drivers, and components, see the section
for that operating system.
Topics:
ENWW
●
MS Windows printing-system software
●
Windows driver configuration
●
HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool
●
HP Embedded Web Server
●
HP Web Jetadmin
Introduction
31
MS Windows printing-system software
Topics:
●
Printing system and installer
●
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology drivers
Printing system and installer
Topics:
●
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology printing-system software CD for MS
Windows systems
●
Installer features
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology printing-system
software CD for MS Windows systems
In the MS Windows environment (Windows Vista, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and
Windows 2000), insert the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Windows
printing-system software CD into the CD-ROM drive to open an interactive CD Browser. Use the CD
Browser to install the print drivers and related components, to gain access to online user
documentation, and to gain access to optional HP software, including an installer customization utility.
The following figure shows the main screen of the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline
Technology Windows printing-system software CD.
32
Chapter 2   Software description
ENWW
Figure 2-1  Windows installation software CD Browser
If the main screen does not appear when you insert the CD into the CD-ROM drive, follow these steps
to open the Windows installation CD Browser:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Click Run.
3.
Click Browse… and navigate to the root directory of the Windows software CD.
4.
Double-click the SETUP.EXE file to start the installer.
The main screen of the Windows software CD Browser contains installation, user documentation, and
software options in the left panel. Move the cursor over each option to see a description of the option
in the right panel.
NOTE:
The options available for each device might differ from those in the figure.
Install. The installation wizard guides the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline
Technology printing-system software installation. Select a Typical Installation, a Typical with Fax
Installation, or a Custom Installation. If you select Typical Installation, only the necessary software is
installed. If you select Custom Installation, select the components that you want to install.
User Documentation. Use this option to view theHP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline
Technology user documentation. Move the cursor over each option to see a description of the
document in the right panel.
ENWW
MS Windows printing-system software
33
Figure 2-2  Documentation screen
The following document options are available:
●
Install Notes
●
Printable Quick Reference Guide
●
Quick Reference Guide (Interactive)
●
Use the Control Panel (PDF Poster)
Click Back to return to the main Windows CD Browser screen.
NOTE: If Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.0 or later is not installed, click any of the links to a
portable document format (.PDF) document to open it in a version of Adobe Acrobat Reader
that runs from the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology printing-system
software CD. The CD browser version of Acrobat Reader is in English only, but can be used to
open localized versions of .PDF documents. The Adobe Acrobat Reader software is not installed
on the computer and can only run while the printing-system software CD is in the CD-ROM
drive. Adobe Acrobat Reader is also available at the following Web site:
www.adobe.com
34
Chapter 2   Software description
ENWW
Optional Software. Use this option to view theHP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline
Technology optional software. Move the cursor over each option to see a description of the document
in the right panel.
Figure 2-3  Optional Software screen
The following optional software programs are available for the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP
with Edgeline Technology:
●
HP Universal Print Driver (UPD). Use this option to link to the HP Web site, where you can
download the HP PCL 6 UPD, the HP PCL5 UPD, and the HP PS Emulation UPD.
●
Installer Customization Wizard. Use this wizard to customize the HP CM8060/CM8050
Color MFP with Edgeline Technology installer by presetting the installation options in a response
file. The resulting customized installer can then be used for silent, unattended installation.
Installer features
The common installer is designed to provide a simple and consistent installation method for the device.
The common installer is available for the Windows Vista, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and
Windows 2000 operating systems.
ENWW
MS Windows printing-system software
35
The common installer offers the following features:
●
The HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Windows printing-system
software CD features an interactive software interface.
●
Network connection is integrated, so a networked device can be connected to and drivers can be
installed on that device in a single process.
●
The selection dialog box sets the operating-system language as the default language. Use the
installer to select any of the languages on the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline
Technology Windows printing-system software CD.
The HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Windows printing-system software
CD also includes the following features:
●
The ability to uninstall the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology printingsystem software by using the Modify Installation option.
●
The HP Installer Customization Wizard for custom installations.
All of the MS Windows system components are installed by using the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color
MFP with Edgeline Technology Windows printing-system installer. The installer automatically detects
the operating system and the default language. Select from the following installation types:
●
Typical Installation
●
Typical with Fax Installation
●
Custom Installation
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology drivers
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology drivers provide the printing features and
communication between the computer and the device. The printing system includes software for end
users and system administrators who are working in the following operating systems:
●
Windows Vista (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows Server 2003 (32bit and 64-bit), and Windows 2000
MS Windows 64-bit drivers for Windows Vista, Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 are
available for the following systems:
AMD Athlon 64, AMD Opteron, Intel Xeon, or Pentium 4 with EMT64
●
NOTE: For the latest information about the printing-system software components, see the
readme files on the Windows CD. For additional information about installing the printing-system
software, see the Hewlett-Packard CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology
Printing-system Install Notes on the Windows printing-system software CD or on the System
Administrator's CD.
All of the print drivers provide access to paper-handling and print-quality features.
Topics:
36
●
Select the best print driver
●
HP print and fax drivers
Chapter 2   Software description
ENWW
●
Driver version numbers for MS Windows operating systems
Select the best print driver
HP print drivers are designed for different environments and uses. See the print driver Help for
available features.
Topics:
●
Complete printing system
●
HP PCL 6 driver
●
HP PCL 5 driver
●
PS Emulation driver
●
HP Universal Print Driver
Complete printing system
Use the Windows printing-system software CD to install the full set of drivers and other software for the
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology.
HP PCL 6 driver
The HP PCL 6 driver provides the best performance, print quality, and printer-feature support for most
users. The driver aligns with MS Windows graphic device interface (GDI) for best performance in MS
Windows environments.
The HP PCL 6 driver may not be fully compatible with third party and custom solutions that are based
on PCL 5.
HP PCL 5 driver
The HP PCL 5 driver is recommended for general office printing in MS Windows environments. The
driver is compatible with previous version of PCL and legacy HP devices.
The HP PCL 5 driver is the best choice for:
●
Any third party or home-grown custom solutions that use forms, fonts, and SAP programs.
●
Any environment with mixed operating-systems (such as UNIX, Linux, and mainframe).
PS Emulation driver
The PS Emulation driver is recommended for printing with Adobe or other graphics-rich software
programs. The driver is compatible with postscript level-3 and supports postscript font DIMMs.
Use the PS Emulation driver in primarily postcript-specific software programs such as Adobe and Corel.
HP Universal Print Driver
The HP PCL6, HP PCL 5, and HP PS emulation universal print drivers are designed for corporate or ITmanaged MS Windows environments. These drivers provide a single PCL 6, PCL 5, or PS emulation
driver for use with multiple device models.
ENWW
MS Windows printing-system software
37
The HP universal print drivers are recommended when printing to multiple device models from a mobile
MS Windows computer.
The HP universal print drivers can be downloaded from the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/universalprintdriver
NOTE: The HP universal print drivers support most, but not all of the features of the
HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5, and HP PS Emulation drivers.
HP print and fax drivers
The following drivers are available on the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline
Technology Windows printing-system software CD:
●
HP MFP Send Fax driver for Windows Vista, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and
Windows 2000
●
HP PCL 6 driver for Windows Vista, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows 2000
●
HP PCL 5 driver for Windows Vista, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows 2000
●
The HP Postscript 3 Emulation driver (PS Emulation driver) for Windows Vista, Windows XP,
Windows Server 2003, and Windows 2000
NOTE: During a Typical Installation of the printing-system software, the HP PCL 6 driver is
installed by default for Windows Vista, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and
Windows 2000.
Table 2-1  Drivers included with the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline
Technology Windows CD
Operating System
HP MFP Send Fax
driver
HP PCL 6 driver
HP PCL 5 driver
PS Emulation
driver
Windows Vista
x
x
x
x
Windows XP
x
x
x
x
Windows Server 2003
x
x
x
x
Windows 2000
x
x
x
x
Driver version numbers for MS Windows operating systems
Access to driver version numbers depends on the operating system in which the HP CM8060/
CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology is installed.
NOTE: For a list of HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology drivers,
updated HP printing-system software, and product-support information, go to one of the
following Web sites:
www.hp.com/support/CM8060edgeline
www.hp.com/support/CM8050edgeline
38
Chapter 2   Software description
ENWW
The Windows Vista operating system supports the HP PCL 6, PCL 5, PS Emulation drivers, and the
HP MFP Send Fax driver. The Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows 2000 operating
systems support the HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers, and the HP MFP Send Fax driver. If
you are using an HP driver in any of these operating systems, follow these steps to find driver-version
information:
1.
Click Start.
2.
For Windows 2000, select Settings, and then click Printers.
For Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003, click Printers and Faxes.
For Windows XP Home, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Printers and Faxes
icon.
3.
Right-click the driver name.
4.
Click Properties.
5.
Click the About tab.
To determine the latest version, compare the overall build number (in parenthesis after the model
name) and the GPD number (in the Driver Files: field). If the overall build number has increased, this is
the latest version of the driver.
If the overall build number is the same, check the version number of the GPD file. The driver that has
the highest GPD version number is the latest driver.
ENWW
MS Windows printing-system software
39
Windows driver configuration
The HP PCL 6, PCL 5, PS Emulation drivers and the HP MFP Send Fax driver feature bidirectional
communication technology which, in operating systems and environments that support the drivers,
provide automatic discovery and driver configuration for device accessories at the time of installation.
Some accessories that are automatically discovered and configured include optional paper trays and
optional output bins.
Topics:
●
Driver autoconfiguration
●
Bidirectional communication
●
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
●
Update Now
●
HP Driver Preconfiguration
Driver autoconfiguration
Automatic discovery and driver autoconfiguration through bidirectional communication occurs in the
following circumstances:
●
When a print driver is installed by using the Windows Installation CD
●
When a print driver is installed by using Windows Plug-and-Play
NOTE: For information about Windows Plug-and-Play installation, see the HewlettPackard CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Printing-system Install
Notes, which is available on the Windows installation CD and on the System
Administrator's CD.
●
When you use the Update Now feature for a driver that is already installed
However, as shown in the following table, driver autoconfiguration and EAC are not available in
Windows Vista, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 (32-bit) operating
systems over a direct connection when the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline
Technology is installed by using the Add Printer Wizard.
Table 2-2  Availability of automatic discovery and driver configuration through bidirectional
communication in Windows Vista, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
40
Connection type
Common installer
Add Printer Wizard
install
Windows Plug-and-Play
install
Network
Yes
Yes
Yes
Direct connection
Yes
No
Yes
Chapter 2   Software description
ENWW
Bidirectional communication
In operating systems and environments that support bidirectional communication, the computer
communicates with the device during installation, determines the physical configuration, and then
configures the driver accordingly.
Bidirectional communication is the capability of the device to respond to data inquiries from the
computer and report information back, such as what type of paper is available or what accessories
are connected to the device. Bidirectional communication depends on the network operating system
and on the type of connection that exists between the computer and the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color
MFP with Edgeline Technology. If the connection does not have this capability (that is, if it has no
bidirectional mode), it can only accept commands from the host and cannot report information back to
the host computer.
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
Enterprise AutoConfiguration (EAC) uses bidirectional communication to provide autoconfiguration
functionality for installation of the print driver over a network, whether you use the installer on the
Windows printing-system software CD or the Add Printer Wizard to install the driver. Driver installation
that includes EAC is configured with the same settings as the physical configuration of the device.
Configuration occurs without user interaction.
If bidirectional-communication software has been installed previously, EAC is not activated, and the preexisting bidirectional-communication software is used to configure the print driver.
If bidirectional communication software has not been installed, EAC installs bidirectionalcommunication software that allows it to communicate with the device and automatically match the
print driver with the actual device configuration. EAC is activated during installation of the driver or
whenever the Update Now feature is used.
If the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology configuration changes after
installation, the driver can be automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that
support bidirectional communication by using the Update Now feature.
Update Now
If the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology configuration has been modified
since installation, the driver can be automatically updated with the new configuration in operating
systems and environments that support bidirectional communication. Use the Update Now feature to
automatically reflect the new configuration in the driver. For example, if the device is installed and an
optional accessory is added later, use the Update Now feature to query the device and update the
settings to match the new device configuration.
The feature automatically updates the registry and changes the configuration information that appears
on the Device Settings tab of the HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers.
NOTE: The Update Now feature does not have to be selected for the HP MFP Send Fax
driver to update.
Every time the HP MFP Send Fax driver is accessed, the driver automatically queries the print
driver to see if any changes have been made that would affect the HP MFP Send Fax driver
configuration. The HP MFP Send Fax driver is automatically updated with any changes.
ENWW
Windows driver configuration
41
Figure 2-4  Update Now dialog box
To activate the Update Now feature for these drivers:
1.
Click Start.
2.
For Windows 2000, select Settings, and then click Printers.
For Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003, click Printers and Faxes.
For Windows XP Home, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Printers and Faxes
icon.
For Windows Vista, click Control Panel, and then under Hardware and Sound, doubleclick onPrinter.
42
3.
Right-click the driver name.
4.
Click Properties.
5.
Click Device Settings.
6.
If necessary, click Installable Options to expand the menu and show the options.
7.
In the Automatic Configuration drop-down menu, select Update Now.
8.
Click OK.
Chapter 2   Software description
ENWW
HP Driver Preconfiguration
HP Driver Preconfiguration is a software architecture and set of tools for customizing and distributing
HP printing-system software in managed corporate printing environments. Using HP Driver
Preconfiguration information, system administrators in corporate and enterprise environments can
preconfigure the printing and device defaults for HP print drivers before installing the drivers in the
network environment.
HP Driver Preconfiguration is most beneficial when configuring print drivers for multiple workstations
or print servers for print queues that share the same configuration. Two types of features can be
configured:
●
Device settings
●
Printing-preferences settings
HP Driver Preconfiguration configures the driver to match the accessories that are installed on the
device, or to match the settings that system administrators make in the configuration .CFG file (for
example, optional trays, total amount of memory, or job-storage settings).
The preconfiguration process consists of three steps:
1.
Driver acquisition
2.
Driver preconfiguration
3.
Driver installation and deployment
These steps can be accomplished in different ways, depending on the tool that is being used to define
the configuration.
The configuration process for driver preconfiguration is supported through three tools. All three are
designed with the same basic user-interface (UI) controls for interacting with the .CFG file, but are
ENWW
Windows driver configuration
43
packaged differently, either to support established device installation workflows or to allow the user to
deploy and install the driver. The following tools support driver preconfiguration:
●
HP Driver Configuration Editor. The HP Driver Configuration Editor is a small standalone
MS Windows software program that system administrators can use to open the .CFG file that is
associated with a particular driver and make modifications that are applied when that driver is
installed on the target computer. Use it in environments that have an established process for
deploying drivers.
The HP Driver Configuration Editor is available at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/hpdpc_sw
●
The HP Web Jetadmin Driver Configuration Plugin. HP Web Jetadmin provides a queuecreation program to create printer queues on any Windows Vista, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 operating systems. The HP Web Jetadmin Driver
Configuration Plugin adds screens to the existing queue-creation workflow from which the drivers
that are being installed for the queues can be customized. The plug-in is limited to Internet
Explorer browsers. Netscape Navigator is not supported.
The HP Web Jetadmin Driver Configuration Plugin is available at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/sbso/tpm/web_jetadminplugin.html
●
Installer Customization Wizard. The Installer Customization Wizard enables a system
administrator to preconfigure the printer drivers as part of customizing the printing system
software installation preparing for a silent install.
For detailed information about customizing print drivers by using the Installer Customization
Wizard, see the Installer Customization Wizard Administrator's Guide, which is available on the
System Administrator's CD.
Topics:
●
Lockable features
●
Continuous export
Lockable features
The following driver features can be locked to prevent end-users from changing settings:
●
Print on Both Sides (duplex). The options are True or False.
●
Color Options. The options are Black and White or Color.
●
Paper Type. The options include all of the paper types that the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color
MFP with Edgeline Technology supports.
●
Paper Source. The options are Printer Auto Select, Manual Feed (Tray 1), Tray 1,
Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray 4, or Tray 5.
When a feature is locked, the selected default option is the only option that is available to users.
Generally, the feature is unavailable in the driver UI after it has been locked.
44
Chapter 2   Software description
ENWW
Continuous export
The term "continuous export" refers to the ability of the driver to copy the latest driver settings to the
working copy of the preconfiguration file. Using this feature, the exported values can be transferred
when a compatible version of the driver is used to upgrade the print driver. For instance, if the
orientation is set to Landscape in a driver that was originally installed in Windows 2000, then the
orientation setting automatically remains Landscape when the operating system is upgraded to
Windows XP or Windows Server 2003. The continuous-export feature functions transparently from
the user perspective and works only between drivers on identical device models.
NOTE: Not all of the driver parameters can be exported. However, the components that can
be exported are always the same as the components that can be preconfigured.
ENWW
Windows driver configuration
45
HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool
Use the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool, a Web-based diagnostic software program, to
determine whether the correct and most current print driver for the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP
with Edgeline Technology is in use. Two methods are available to gain access to the HP Driver
Diagnostic Printer Check Tool:
1.
Open a Web browser.
2.
Go to the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/drivercheck
Alternatively:
1.
Open a Web browser.
2.
Go to the HP Business Support Center (BSC) at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/bsc
3.
Click the self-help resources link on the left navigation bar.
4.
Click automatic driver checker to run the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool.
When the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool runs, the devices that are currently installed on the
computer appear in a list. The tool gathers information about the devices, drivers, and system setup in
order to diagnose the software driver configurations and check the print drivers.
When the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool is open, select the HP device that you want to
check. The tool verifies whether the latest driver is being used, provides feedback if an incorrect driver
is being used, and indicates whether an updated driver version is available. Click the latest driver
version to download and install it.
The data that the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool gathers is stored anonymously so that
HP can analyze and continuously improve its diagnostic tools. No private data is gathered from the
computer.
46
Chapter 2   Software description
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server
The HP Embedded Web Server (HP EWS) is a standard feature on all HP CM8060/CM8050 Color
MFP with Edgeline Technology devices that are connected through a network.
The HP EWS provides a simple, easy-to-use solution for one-to-one device management. Instead of
installing management software, such as HP Web Jetadmin, use HP EWS for remote management in
offices that have a limited number of devices. The management console must have a supported Web
browser.
In environments that have a larger number of devices, in which one-to-one management is impractical,
the HP Embedded Web Server and HP Web Jetadmin work together to provide scalable remote
device management. Use HP Web Jetadmin to consolidate management tasks and perform operations
on a selected set of devices. For such environments, HP provides hooks between the HP EWS and
HP Web Jetadmin so that HP EWS features can be configured on multiple devices in one operation.
For example, you can set the security password for the HP EWS simultaneously on a cluster of devices.
For more detailed information about the HP EWS, see the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with
Edgeline Technology System Administrator Guide, which is available on the System Administrator's
CD. Or, for additional information and a copy of the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline
Technology System Administrator Guide, go to one of the following Web sites:
www.hp.com/support/CM8060edgeline
www.hp.com/support/CM8050edgeline
Topics:
●
Access to the HP EWS
●
The HP EWS frame
●
Information tab
●
Settings tab
●
Digital Sending tab
●
Fax tab
●
Networking tab
●
Security
●
Kerberos Authentication
●
HP EWS login process
Access to the HP EWS
To open the HP EWS and view information about the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with
Edgeline Technology, open a supported Web browser and type the device transmission control
protocol/internet protocol (TCP/IP) address or host name in the address field.
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server
47
To find the device TCP/IP address, look for IP Address on the device configuration page (the
Embedded Jetdirect page), which can be printed from the device control-panel display. Follow these
steps to print an Embedded Jetdirect page:
1.
Touch Network Address.
2.
Touch Print.
The HP EWS frame
Each screen in the HP EWS is a frame that contains a top banner, five category tabs, a left-aligned
navigation menu bar, and a main-content area. Selecting one of the category tabs causes the
corresponding left-aligned navigation bar to appear, where a menu includes links to content for that
tab. The main-content area shows information and opens options in response to navigation-tab
selections and menu-bar selections.
NOTE: In a password-protected HP EWS, only the Information tab is available to users
who do not log in by using the password. If no password is set (which is the default
configuration), all of the tabs are available.
When the HP EWS screens are opened immediately after the device is turned on, the HP EWS
screens may change as you browse. Complete information becomes available when the device
enters the Ready state.
Information tab
The Information tab allows you to access and print out detailed information regarding device and
supply status, device configuration, network configuration, and usage.
The Information tab contains the following pages:
●
Device Status
●
Configuration Page
●
Supplies Status Page
●
Event Log Page
●
Usage Page
●
Device Information
●
Control Panel Snapshot
●
Jam History Page
●
Print
Device Status
The Device Status page shows device status messages from the device. The Device Status page
also displays some pertinent device information and device settings.
48
Chapter 2   Software description
ENWW
Figure 2-5  HP EWS – Device Status page
Configuration Page
The Configuration Page displays the values of all of the settings available to be set in the device.
The contents of this screen are consistent with the configuration page generated by the firmware.
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server
49
Figure 2-6  HP EWS – Configuration Page (1 of 2)
50
Chapter 2   Software description
ENWW
Figure 2-7  HP EWS – Configuration Page (2 of 2)
Supplies Status Page
The Supplies Status Page displays the status of all of the supplies used by the device, including the
black, cyan, magenta, and yellow ink cartridges, and the bonding agent cartridge.
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server
51
Figure 2-8  HP EWS – Supplies Status Page
Event Log Page
Use the Event Log Page to track the events that occur on the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with
Edgeline Technology.
52
Chapter 2   Software description
ENWW
Figure 2-9  HP EWS – Event Log Page
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server
53
Usage Page
The Usage Page gives a page count for each size of paper that has passed through the device, as
well as the number of duplexed pages. The total is calculated by multiplying the sum of the print count
values by the Units value.
The information on this page can be used to determine how much ink or paper to keep on hand. The
Usage Page is shown in the following figures.
Figure 2-10  HP EWS – Usage Page (1 of 3)
54
Chapter 2   Software description
ENWW
Figure 2-11  HP EWS – Usage Page (2 of 3)
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server
55
Figure 2-12  HP EWS – Usage Page (3 of 3)
56
Chapter 2   Software description
ENWW
Device Information
The Device Information page shows the following information:
●
Device name
●
Device location
●
Asset number
●
Company name
●
Contact person
●
Product name
●
Device model
●
Device serial number
The device name, device model, and device serial number are generated automatically. You can
configure the other information on this page from the Device Information page on the Settings tab.
Figure 2-13  HP EWS – Device Information page
Control Panel Snapshot
The Control Panel Snapshot page shows the device control-panel display as if you were standing
at the device. Because this view shows the device status, it can help you troubleshoot problems with
the device.
NOTE:
ENWW
The appearance of the page might vary, depending on your device.
HP Embedded Web Server
57
Figure 2-14  HP EWS – Control Panel Snapshot page
Jam History Page
The Jam History Page shows a history of jams that have occurred. It includes a summary of the
three most-frequent jams that have occurred during the past 14 days.
58
Chapter 2   Software description
ENWW
Figure 2-15  HP EWS – Jam History Page
Print
NOTE: The Print page (and the Print menu on the left) is available only if it has been
configured to appear on the Security page under the Settings tab. Use the Security page to
disable the Print page if you do not want it to appear for security reasons.
Use the Print page to print print-ready files.
You can use the Print page to print one file at a time from a device that supports the HP EWS. This
feature is especially useful if you are a mobile user, because you do not have to install the print driver
in order to print; you can print anywhere at any time.
You can print print-ready files, such as documents that have been generated by using a "print to file"
driver option. Print-ready files commonly have file name extensions such as .PS (postscript), .PDF
(Adobe Portable Document Format), and .PRN (Windows print-ready File).
The Print page is shown in the following figure.
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server
59
Figure 2-16  HP EWS – Print page
Printing a file or updating firmware from the Print page
Use the following procedure to print a file or update device firmware from the Print page.
1.
Select a file that resides on your computer or on your network by clicking Browse to browse to a
file that you want to print.
2.
Click Apply.
Settings tab
The Settings tab allows you to view and change settings for the following features:
60
●
Configure Device
●
Notification Server
●
Alerts
●
AutoSend
●
Security
●
Device Security
●
Restrict Color
●
Edit Other Links
●
Device Information
●
Language
●
Date & Time
Chapter 2   Software description
ENWW
●
Sleep Schedule
●
Backup and Restore
●
Solution Installer
Configure Device
You can use the Configure Device page to print device information pages and configure the device
remotely.
The menus on this page are similar to the menus that are available at your device control panel. Some
of the device control-panel menus are not available from the HP EWS. See the documentation that
came with your device for more information about the different menus that your device supports.
The Configure Device page is shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-17  HP EWS – Configure Device page
Using the menus on the Configure Device page
The following procedure is provided only as an example. Similar procedures can be used to set other
menu items.
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server
61
Follow these steps to print a configuration page (example procedure).
1.
Click INFORMATION.
2.
Select the check box for the information page that you want to view or print, and then click Apply.
Notification Server
Use the Notification Server page to configure e-mail settings for outgoing e-mail. Use the settings
on this page to send and receive e-mail messages, including alerts. The Notification Server page is
shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-18  HP EWS – Notification Server page
Configuring outgoing e-mail
You must configure outgoing e-mail if you intend to use the Alerts or AutoSend features.
1.
62
Gather the following information. (Your organization's network or e-mail administrator typically
provides the information that is required to configure outgoing mail.)
●
The TCP/IP address of the simple mail transfer protocol (SMTP) mail server on your network.
The EWS uses the SMTP server TCP/IP address to relay e-mail messages to other computers.
●
The e-mail domain name suffix that is used to address e-mail messages within your
organization.
2.
Select the Enable Outgoing E-mail check box.
3.
Type the SMTP server TCP/IP address in the SMTP Server text box.
4.
Type the domain name in the Domain Name text box.
5.
Click Apply to save the changes.
Chapter 2   Software description
ENWW
Configuring the return e-mail address
When you configure the return e-mail address on the E-mail Server page, you are configuring the
identity of the device. For example, if you type anyone in the Username field and
your.company.com in the Domain Name field, all e-mails sent out by the device will come from
anyone@your.company.com. In this example, anyone@your.company.com is the identity of the
device.
Alerts
From the Alerts page, system administrators can set up the device to send problem and status alerts to
anyone through e-mail messages. When this function is configured, alerts are automatically triggered
about supplies, paper-path status, and other service and advisory information. More than one
individual can receive alerts, with each person receiving only specific alerts. For example, an
administrative assistant might be responsible for ordering cartridges or fixing jams, and could receive
advanced warning when ink or the bonding agent is low, or when a jam occurs. Similarly, the long-life
supplies might be handled by an external service provider, who could receive alerts about performing
device maintenance, loading the front or rear stapler, and similar needs.
NOTE:
list.
A user can create up to four different destination lists, with up to 20 recipients on each
By selecting the Remove Control Panel Supplies Status Messages option (available on the
Alerts - setup page that appears when you press the New Destination List button), you can
suppress the Cartridge low or Cartridge out supplies status messages on the control panel. The
message is suppressed at the control panel only if one or both of these alerts has first been selected to
be received.
The Alerts page is shown in the following figure.
NOTE:
In order for alerts to function, outgoing e-mail must be enabled.
Figure 2-19  HP EWS – Alerts page
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server
63
For information about using the Alerts page, see the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline
Technology System Administrator Guide, which is available on the System Administrator's CD.
AutoSend
Use the AutoSend page to send device-configuration and supplies-usage information periodically to email destinations of your choice, such as service providers. This feature establishes a relationship with
Hewlett-Packard Company or another service provider to provide you with services that include, but
are not limited to, cartridge replacement, pay-per-page contracts, support agreements, and usage
tracking. A user can add up to twenty AutoSend destinations. The AutoSend page is shown in the
following figure.
Figure 2-20  HP EWS – AutoSend page
Turn on the AutoSend feature
Use the following procedure to make the AutoSend feature available.
64
1.
Make outgoing e-mail functions available by following the instructions that are listed in this chapter.
2.
Select the Enable AutoSend check box.
3.
Click an option to specify the interval at which you want the device to send the deviceconfiguration and supplies-usage information to the e-mail recipients (determined in the next step),
and then type the number of days, weeks, months, or pages printed.
4.
Configure up to 20 destinations using the format that appears on the page.
5.
To send device configuration and supplies status information to HP, select the Send to HP check
box.
6.
Click Apply.
Chapter 2   Software description
ENWW
Security
The Security page is shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-21  HP EWS – Security page
Device Security
The Device Security page is shown in the following figure.
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server
65
Figure 2-22  HP EWS – Device Security page
Restrict Color
Use the Restrict Color page to enable or disable color printing and copying for the device for all
users, or you can enable or disable color for members of certain permission sets. If color is restricted,
the device checks the username that is associated with each job. If restrictions are in place for that
user, the device automatically prints according to the restrictions. For example, if a user is allowed to
print with General Office color quality but not with Professional color quality, the device automatically
uses General Office color quality for that user. The Restrict Color page is shown in the following
figure.
66
Chapter 2   Software description
ENWW
Figure 2-23  HP EWS – Restrict Color page
Edit Other Links
Use the Edit Other Links page to add or customize up to five links to the Web sites of your choice
(see the following note). These links appear throughout the HP EWS pages in the Other Links box
beneath the left navigational bar. One permanent link (Product Support) has already been
established. The Edit Other Links page is shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-24  HP EWS – Edit Other Links page
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server
67
Adding a link
Use this procedure to add a link.
1.
Under Add Link, type the URL and the name of the link as you would like it to appear in the
HP EWS.
2.
Click Add Link.
Removing a link
Use this procedure to remove a link.
1.
Under User-defined Links, select the link or links that you would like to remove.
2.
Click Remove Selected Link.
Device Information
Use the Device Information page to provide a name of your choice for the device, assign an asset
number, and configure the company name, the person to contact about the device, and the physical
location of the device. The device TCP/IP address, device name, device model, and serial number are
also available on this page.
Figure 2-25  HP EWS – Device Information page
If you make any changes on the Device Information page, click Apply to save the changes.
The information that is typed here appears on the Device Information page that can be opened
from the Information tab. It also appears in e-mail messages that are sent from the device. This
might be useful if you need to locate the device to replace supplies or fix a problem.
Language
Use the Language page to select the language in which the HP EWS pages appear. The
Language page is shown in the following figure.
68
Chapter 2   Software description
ENWW
Figure 2-26  HP EWS – Language page
CAUTION: Selecting View Pages in Device Language or Select A Language
changes the language for everyone who uses the HP EWS.
The default language is the language that the Web browser is currently using. If your browser and
control panel both use a language that is not available for the HP EWS, English is selected as the
default. If you make any changes on the Language page, click Apply to save your changes.
Date & Time
Use the Date & Time page to update the time. The Date & Time page is shown in the following
figure.
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server
69
Figure 2-27  HP EWS – Date & Time page
70
Chapter 2   Software description
ENWW
Date &Time - Advanced
Use the Date &Time - Advanced page to select the formats you prefer for displaying the date
(under Current Date) and time (under Current Time). The following figure shows the Date &Time
- Advanced page.
Figure 2-28  HP EWS – Date &Time - Advanced page
Sleep Schedule
The Sleep Schedule page is shown in the following figure.
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server
71
Figure 2-29  HP EWS – Sleep Schedule page
Backup and Restore
The Backup and Restore page is shown in the following figure.
72
Chapter 2   Software description
ENWW
Figure 2-30  HP EWS – Backup and Restore page
Solution Installer
The Solution Installer page is shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-31  HP EWS – Solution Installer page
Digital Sending tab
Use the pages available on the HP EWS Digital Sending tab to control the digital-sending features
of the device.
The Digital Sending tab allows you to view and change settings for the following features:
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server
73
●
Address Book
●
E-mail Setup
●
Network Folder Setup
Address Book
The Address Book page is shown in the following figures.
Figure 2-32  HP EWS – Address Book page (1 of 3)
74
Chapter 2   Software description
ENWW
Figure 2-33  HP EWS – Address Book page (2 of 3)
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server
75
Figure 2-34  HP EWS – Address Book page (3 of 3)
E-mail Setup
The E-mail Setup page is shown in the following figures.
76
Chapter 2   Software description
ENWW
Figure 2-35  HP EWS – E-mail Setup page (1 of 2)
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server
77
Figure 2-36  HP EWS – E-mail Setup page (2 of 2)
Network Folder Setup
The Network Folder Setup page is shown in the following figure.
78
Chapter 2   Software description
ENWW
Figure 2-37  HP EWS – Network Folder Setup page
Fax tab
Use the pages available on the HP EWS Fax tab to control the fax features of the device.
The Fax tab allows you to view and change settings for the following features:
●
Fax Send Setup
●
Fax Activity Log
●
Import Speed Dials
Fax Send Setup
The Fax Send Setup page is shown in the following figure.
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server
79
Figure 2-38  HP EWS – Fax Send Setup page
Fax Activity Log
The Fax Activity Log page is shown in the following figure.
80
Chapter 2   Software description
ENWW
Figure 2-39  HP EWS – Fax Activity Log page
Import Speed Dials
The Import Speed Dials page is shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-40  HP EWS – Import Speed Dials page
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server
81
Networking tab
The HP EWS Networking tab is shown in the following figure.
NOTE: Not all of the pages on the tab are shown in this document. For more information, see
the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology System Administrator Guide,
which is available on the System Administrator's CD.
Figure 2-41  HP EWS Networking tab – Network Settings page
The menu on the left side of the page contains other networking options under three categories:
●
Configuration
●
Security section
●
Diagnostics section
Configuration
●
82
Network Setting. From the Networking page, enable and configure the following network
protocols:
●
TCP/IP settings
●
Network settings:
●
Internetwork packet exchange/Sequenced packet exchange (IPX/SPX)
●
AppleTalk
Chapter 2   Software description
ENWW
●
Data link control/logical link control (DLC/LLC)
●
Simple network management protocol (SNMP)
●
Other Settings
●
Privacy Settings
●
Select Language
Security section
●
Settings
●
Authorization
●
Mgmt. Protocols
●
802.1x authentication
●
Firewall
Diagnostics section
●
Network Statistics
●
Protocol Info
●
Configuration Page
Refer to the HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide on the System Administrator's CD for more information.
Security
The HP EWS pages that appear, and the settings on them, vary according to the specific HP EWS.
Two modes of user access are possible:
●
General user
●
System administrator
To control access to the HP EWS pages, set a password on the Security page.
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server
83
Figure 2-42  HP EWS Settings tab – Security page
In a password-protected HP EWS, only the Information tab is available to users who do not log in
by using the password. If no password is set (which is the default configuration), all of the tabs are
available.
If a password has been set, log on as a system administrator to gain access to the protected HP EWS
tabs (Settings, Digital Sending, Fax, and Networking).
NOTE: For more information, see the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline
Technology System Administrator Guide, which is available on the System Administrator's CD.
Kerberos Authentication
Kerberos is a network authentication protocol designed to provide secure authentication for client/
server programs by using the secret keys that are delivered with session tickets.
HP EWS login process
A system administrator can use the login process to gain access to sensitive information and carry out
privileged tasks. This process provides different page content for different users.
The HP EWS provides two different ways for the user to perform the login process, depending on the
current level of protection:
●
If an administrator password has been set, the HP EWS presents a Log In link in the upper-right
of all pages on the Information tab (the only tab visible to an unauthenticated user) where the
user can log in to the system.
●
If no administrator password has been set, any user can open any page and have the rights of a
system administrator.
An HP EWS for which no administrator password has been set is an "unprotected system." When an
administrator password is set, the HP EWS is a "protected system", and the login process differs.
84
Chapter 2   Software description
ENWW
Topics:
●
Protected system
●
Unprotected system
●
Password behavior
Protected system
When the user first browses to the HP EWS in a protected system, the page that appears is the
Device Status page on the Information tab.
Figure 2-43  HP EWS home page in a password-protected system
All of the pages on the Information tab show the Log In link in the upper-right corner. When the
user clicks that link, an authentication pop-up window appears. To log in as system administrator, type
"admin" as the user name, and then type the correct password. The page remains the same, except
the Log In link changes to a Log Off link and all of the tabs are visible, as shown in the following
figure.
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server
85
Figure 2-44  HP EWS home page with an admin user logged in
To log out of the system, click the Log Off link and close the browser.
Unprotected system
Browsing to the device TCP/IP address in an unprotected system opens the Device Status page that
appears on the Information tab, but all tabs are visible. Access privileges are the same as for the
system administrator. All tabs and settings are available for configuration tasks.
Password behavior
No administrator password is set when the device is shipped, which means that the system is
unprotected. Any HP EWS user automatically has all system administrator privileges until a password
is set. After a password is set, only the system administrator has access to the Security page that is
used to configure the password. The administration password can be cleared (set to an empty string) to
remove the protection from the system and return it to the default configuration.
86
Chapter 2   Software description
ENWW
HP Web Jetadmin
Use the HP Web Jetadmin and a browser to manage HP Jetdirect-connected devices within an
intranet. HP Web Jetadmin is a browser-based management tool that should be installed only on a
single network-administration server.
To download a current version of HP Web Jetadmin, and for the latest list of host systems that support
HP Web Jetadmin, go to the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin
ENWW
HP Web Jetadmin
87
88
Chapter 2   Software description
ENWW
3
Install MS Windows printingsystem components
Introduction
The HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology comes with software and installers
for MS Windows and Apple Computer, Inc., Macintosh systems. Linux and UNIX systems support the
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology, and software is available on the Web.
This STR provides procedures for installing and uninstalling the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with
Edgeline Technology printing-system software.
Topics:
ENWW
●
Font support
●
Print-driver installation instructions
●
Fax-driver installation instructions
Introduction
89
Font support
The following sections list the fonts that are included with MS Windows software, and the fonts that are
available on the Windows installation CD that came with the device.
Topics:
●
Basic fonts
●
Default fonts
Basic fonts
MS Windows software includes these basic fonts, which can be used with any HP printing device:
●
Arial
●
Arial Bold
●
Arial Bold Italic
●
Arial Italic
●
Courier New
●
Courier New Bold
●
Courier New Bold Italic
●
Courier New Italic
●
Symbol
●
Times New Roman
●
Times New Roman Bold
●
Times New Roman Bold Italic
●
Times New Roman Italic
●
Wingdings
Default fonts
The following default fonts are installed through a Typical Installation or a Typical with Fax Installation
of the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology printing-system software.
Table 3-1  Default fonts
90
Font name
Font style
File name
Albertus Extra Bold
Regular
ALBR85W.TTF
Albertus Medium
Regular
ALBR55W.TTF
Antique Olive
Regular
OLVR55W.TTF
Antique Olive
Bold
OLVR75W.TTF
Antique Olive
Italic
OLVR56W.TTF
Chapter 3   Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Table 3-1  Default fonts (continued)
ENWW
Font name
Font style
File name
CG Omega
Regular
CGOR45W.TTF
CG Omega
Bold
CGOR65W.TTF
CG Omega
Bold Italic
CGOR66W.TTF
CG Omega
Italic
CGOR46W.TTF
CG Times
Regular
CGTR45W.TTF
CG Times
Bold
CGTR65W.TTF
CG Times
Bold Italic
CGTR66W.TTF
CG Times
Italic
CGTR46W.TTF
Clarendon Condensed
Bold
CLAR67W.TTF
Coronet
Regular
CORONET.TTF
CourierPS
Regular
CPSR45W.TTF
CourierPS
Bold
CPSR65W.TTF
CourierPS
Bold Oblique
CPSR66W.TTF
CourierPS
Oblique
CPSR46W.TTF
Garamond
Antiqua
GARR45W.TTF
Garamond
Halbfett
GARR65W.TTF
Garamond
Kursiv
GARR46W.TTF
Garamond
Kursiv Halbfett
GARR66W.TTF
Helvetica®
Regular
HELR45W.TTF
Helvetica
Bold
HELR65W.TTF
Helvetica
Bold Oblique
HELR66W.TTF
Helvetica
Oblique
HELR46W.TTF
Helvetica Narrow
Regular
HELR47W.TTF
Helvetica Narrow
Bold
HELR67W.TTF
Helvetica Narrow
Bold Oblique
HELR68W.TTF
Helvetica Narrow
Oblique
HELR48W.TTF
ITC Avant Garde Gothic
Book
AVGR45W.TTF
ITC Avant Garde Gothic
Book Oblique
AVGR46W.TTF
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi
Regular
AVGR65W.TTF
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi
Oblique
AVGR66W.TTF
ITC Bookman Light
Regular
BOKR35W.TTF
ITC Bookman Light
Italic
BOKR36W.TTF
ITC Bookman Demi
Regular
BOKR75W.TTF
ITC Bookman Demi
Italic
BOKR76W.TTF
Font support
91
Table 3-1  Default fonts (continued)
Font name
Font style
File name
ITC Zapf Chancery
Medium Italic
CHANC___.TTF
ITC Zapf Dingbats
Regular
DINGS___.TTF
Letter Gothic
Regular
LETR45W.TTF
Letter Gothic
Bold
LETR65W.TTF
Letter Gothic
Italic
LETR46W.TTF
Marigold
Regular
MARIGOLD.TTF
New Century Schoolbook
Bold
NCSR75W.TTF
New Century Schoolbook
Bold Italic
NCSR76W.TTF
New Century Schoolbook
Italic
NCSR56W.TTF
New Century Schoolbook
Roman
NCSR55W.TTF
Palatino
Bold
PALR65W.TTF
Palatino
Bold Italic
PALR66W.TTF
Palatino
Italic
PALR46W.TTF
Palatino
Roman
PALR45W.TTF
SymbolPS
Regular
SYMPS__.TTF
Times*
Bold
TIMR65W.TTF
Times
Bold Italic
TIMR66W.TTF
Times
Italic
TIMR46W.TTF
Times
Roman
TIMR45W.TTF
Univers
Bold
UNVR65W.TTF
Univers
Bold Italic
UNVR66W.TTF
Univers
Medium
UNVR55W.TTF
Univers
Medium Italic
UNVR56W.TTF
Univers Condensed
Bold
UNVR67W.TTF
Univers Condensed
Bold Italic
UNVR68W.TTF
Univers Condensed
Medium
UNVR57W.TTF
Univers Condensed
Medium Italic
UNVR58W.TTF
Ninety-two additional PS emulation fonts are available on the Windows installation CD.
Table 3-2  Additional PS emulation fonts
92
Font name
Font style
File name
Albertus MT
Regular
PS_12639.TTF
Albertus MT
Italic
PS_12640.TTF
Albertus MT Lt
Regular
PS_14530.TTF
Chapter 3   Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Table 3-2  Additional PS emulation fonts (continued)
ENWW
Font name
Font style
File name
Antique Olive CompactPS
Regular
PS_11120.TTF
Antique Olive Roman
Regular
PS_11119.TTF
Antique Olive Roman
Bold
PS_11118.TTF
Antique Olive Roman
Italic
PS_11846.TTF
Apple Chancery
Italic
PS_24516.TTF
Bodoni Poster
Regular
PS_12704.TTF
Bodoni PosterCompressed
Regular
PS_14508.TTF
BodoniPS
Regular
PS_12581.TTF
BodoniPS
Bold
PS_12585.TTF
BodoniPS
Bold Italic
PS_12586.TTF
BodoniPS
Italic
PS_12582.TTF
Candid
Regular
PS_24517.TTF
Chicago
Regular
PS_24518.TTF
Clarendon Light
Regular
PS_14513.TTF
ClarendonPS
Regular
PS_10269.TTF
ClarendonPS
Bold
PS_12968.TTF
Cooper Black
Regular
PS_10369.TTF
Cooper Black
Italic
PS_10370.TTF
Copperplate32bc
Regular
PS_14514.TTF
Copperplate33bc
Regular
PS_14515.TTF
CoronetPS
Italic
PS_10249.TTF
Eurostile
Regular
PS_10267.TTF
Eurostile Bold
Regular
PS_10268.TTF
Eurostile ExtendedTwo
Bold
PS_14512.TTF
Eurostile ExtendedTwo
Regular
PS_14511.TTF
Geneva
Regular
PS_24509.TTF
GillSans
Regular
PS_13872.TTF
GillSans
Bold
PS_13874.TTF
GillSans
Bold Italic
PS_13875.TTF
GillSans Condensed
Regular
PS_14053.TTF
GillSans Condensed
Bold
PS_14054.TTF
GillSans ExtraBold
Regular
PS_14051.TTF
GillSans
Italic
PS_13873.TTF
GillSans Light
Italic
PS_13871.TTF
Font support
93
Table 3-2  Additional PS emulation fonts (continued)
94
Font name
Font style
File name
GillSans Light
Regular
PS_13870.TTF
Goudy
Bold
PS_12544.TTF
Goudy
Bold Italic
PS_10695.TTF
Goudy
Regular
PS_12542.TTF
Goudy ExtraBold
Regular
PS_12545.TTF
Goudy
Italic
PS_12543.TTF
Helvetica Condensed
Regular
PS_14526.TTF
Helvetica Condensed
Bold
PS_14528.TTF
Helvetica Condensed
Bold Italic
PS_14529.TTF
Helvetica Condensed
Italic
PS_14527.TTF
Hoefler Text
Regular
PS_24519.TTF
Hoefler Text Black
Regular
PS_24521.TTF
Hoefler Text Black
Italic
PS_24522.TTF
Hoefler Text
Italic
PS_24520.TTF
Hoefler Text Ornaments
Regular
PS_24523.TTF
Joanna MT
Regular
PS_14503.TTF
Joanna MT
Bold
PS_14505.TTF
Joanna MT
Bold Italic
PS_14506.TTF
Joanna MT
Italic
PS_14504.TTF
Letter Gothic
Italic
PS_13778.TTF
Letter GothicPS
Regular
PS_13777.TTF
Letter GothicPS
Bold
PS_13779.TTF
Letter GothicPS
Bold Italic
PS_13780.TTF
Lubalin Graph
Regular
PS_12675.TTF
Lubalin Graph
Bold
PS_12677.TTF
Lubalin Graph
Bold Italic
PS_12625.TTF
Lubalin Graph
Italic
PS_12623.TTF
MarigoldPS
Regular
PS_94073.TTF
Mona Lisa Recut
Regular
PS_14525.TTF
Monaco
Regular
PS_24524.TTF
New York
Regular
PS_24510.TTF
Optima
Regular
PS_12506.TTF
Optima
Bold
PS_12510.TTF
Optima
Bold Italic
PS_12511.TTF
Chapter 3   Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Table 3-2  Additional PS emulation fonts (continued)
ENWW
Font name
Font style
File name
Optima
Italic
PS_12507.TTF
Oxford
Italic
PS_14072.TTF
StempelGaramond Roman
Italic
PS_11546.TTF
StempelGaramond Roman
Regular
PS_11545.TTF
StempelGaramond Roman
Bold
PS_11547.TTF
StempelGaramond Roman
Bold Italic
PS_11548.TTF
Taffy
Regular
PS_14507.TTF
Univers 45 Light
Regular
PS_13501.TTF
Univers 45 Light
Bold
PS_14023.TTF
Univers 45 Light
Bold Italic
PS_14024.TTF
Univers 45 Light
Italic
PS_13502.TTF
Univers 47 CondensedLight
Bold
PS_14030.TTF
Univers 47 CondensedLight
Bold Italic
PS_14040.TTF
Univers 55
Regular
PS_14021.TTF
Univers 55
Italic
PS_14022.TTF
Univers 57 Condensed
Regular
PS_14029.TTF
Univers 57 Condensed
Italic
PS_14039.TTF
Univers ExtendedPS
Bold
PS_13548.TTF
Univers ExtendedPS
Regular
PS_13547.TTF
Univers ExtendedPS
Bold Italic
PS_14481.TTF
Univers ExtendedPS
Italic
PS_14480.TTF
Font support
95
Print-driver installation instructions
Topics:
●
General MS Windows installation instructions
●
Detailed MS Windows installation instructions
●
Set a default printer
General MS Windows installation instructions
Installation is similar for the Windows Vista, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and
Windows 2000 operating systems.
If the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology is connected through a file or print
server, the printing-system software must be installed on the server before being installed on any client
systems. If the printing-system software is not installed on the server first, then bidirectional
communication and some driver autoconfiguration methods are not available to the client systems.
For Windows Vista, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows 2000, the person
installing the software must have administrator rights on the system.
When the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology printing-system installer runs,
the uninstaller is added to the system.
Topics:
●
Install from the Windows printing-system CD
●
Install from a network or from downloaded files
Install from the Windows printing-system CD
Follow these instructions to install the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology
printing system from the Windows installation CD that came with the device.
1.
Quit all unnecessary software programs.
2.
Insert the Windows installation CD into the CD-ROM drive.
NOTE: If the CD does not start automatically, click Start, click Run, and then browse to
and double-click the SETUP.EXE file in the root directory of the CD.
3.
96
Click Install and follow the onscreen prompts.
Chapter 3   Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Install from a network or from downloaded files
Follow these instructions when installing printing-system files that have been downloaded from the
Web, or when installing files from a network. See the system administrator for the location of the
printing-system software file.
1.
Browse to the location of the SETUP.EXE file.
2.
Double-click the SETUP.EXE file.
3.
Click Install and continue to follow the instructions until the device is installed. For detailed
installation instructions, see Detailed MS Windows installation instructions on page 97.
Detailed MS Windows installation instructions
A series of dialog boxes appear during installation of the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with
Edgeline Technology printing-system software in MS Windows operating systems.
Topics:
●
Help, Back, Next, and Cancel buttons
●
Direct-connect installation through a USB port
●
Unsupported operating system dialog box
●
Installation dialog-box sequence
●
Modify a pre-existing installation
●
Install drivers by using Add Printer
●
Installer Customization Wizard for Windows
●
Point-and-Print installation for Windows Vista, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003
Help, Back, Next, and Cancel buttons
Click the Help button on any screen where it appears to find suggestions for and explanations about
the installation process.
Click the Back button in any installation dialog box to return to the previous dialog box. The specific
dialog box depends on previous selections.
Select any options on a screen and click the Next button to proceed to the next step in the installation
sequence.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions
97
To exit the installation sequence without installing the device, follow these steps from any dialog box
where the Cancel button appears.
1.
Click Cancel. A dialog box opens that prompts you with this question: “Are you sure you want to
cancel the installation?”
Figure 3-1  Are you sure you want to cancel the installation? dialog box
2.
Click Yes. The Cancel dialog box opens, stating that the setup was unable to complete the
installation.
Figure 3-2  Cancel dialog box
3.
Click Finish to exit the installation.
Direct-connect installation through a USB port
The printing-system software should be installed before the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with
Edgeline Technology is connected to the computer through a USB connection and turned on. During
the installation process, the software generates a prompt to connect the device.
Unsupported operating system dialog box
The MS Windows NT 4.0 and MS Windows 98 operating systems do not support the HP CM8060/
CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology. When attempting to install the software in these
operating systems, an Unsupported Operating System dialog box appears.
98
Chapter 3   Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
An example of an Unsupported Operating System dialog box is shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-3  Setup Error – Unsupported Operating System, MS Windows 98
Installation dialog-box sequence
NOTE: Install the printing-system software before the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with
Edgeline Technology is connected to the computer through a USB connection and turned on.
During the installation process, the software generates a prompt to connect the device. For a
network installation, connect the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology
to the network and turn it on before installing the printing-system software.
NOTE: The dialog boxes shown in this STR appear in the Windows Vista or Windows XP
Professional installation. The order and appearance of dialog boxes can vary among operating
systems.
Click Install on the main screen of the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology
Windows printing-system software CD Browser. The Welcome to the HP CM8060/CM8050
Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Setup Wizard dialog box appears.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions
99
NOTE: If you are installing the printing-system software on a system that runs a non-supported
default language, a Language Selection dialog box appears. Select any other language
that is available on the Windows installation CD by clicking the down arrow on the drop-down
menu, and then click OK to initiate the printing-system setup. The Welcome to the HP
CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Setup Wizard dialog box
appears.
Figure 3-4  Welcome to the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline
Technology Setup Wizard dialog box
Read the software-license agreement, and then click Yes to proceed with the installation.
The Printer Connection dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.
100 Chapter 3   Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Figure 3-5  Printer Connection dialog box
Two options are available in the Printer Connection dialog box:
●
Connected to the network
●
USB Cable
The I want to connect my printer after completing the setup wizard. check box is
unavailable by default. Select USB Cable, and then select this check box to install the software
now but connect to the device at a later time.
NOTE: The HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology does not support
infrared connections or connections over a parallel port.
NOTE: Install the printing-system software before the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with
Edgeline Technology is connected to the computer through a USB connection and turned on.
During the installation process, the software generates a prompt to connect the device.
NOTE: When plugged into an individual device, a USB port is created during the driver
installation. As a result, plugging in five different devices results in five new copies of the driver
and five new USB ports. The extra copies of the driver can be deleted, but the extra ports
cannot be deleted unless the extra copies of the driver are deleted while the USB is connected.
If the USB is disconnected, the extra driver copies can be deleted, but the extra USB ports
cannot be deleted.
Select USB Cable (a direct connection that uses a USB 2.0 cable) and then click Next. The Model
dialog box appears (see Figure 3-20 Model dialog box on page 116).
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions 101
When installing the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology over the network,
select Connected to the network in the Printer Connection dialog box, and then click Next.
NOTE: For a network installation, connect the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with
Edgeline Technology to the network and turn it on before continuing to install the printing-system
software.
NOTE: “Wired networking” refers to the print device being connected to the network through
a network cable. For wireless installation instructions when using an HP Jetdirect ew2400
802.11g Wireless Print Server or an HP Direct 380x802.11B wireless print server, consult the
documentation that comes with the print server.
If the network has a firewall that is blocking the installation, the Firewall Detected dialog box
appears for Windows XP, or the Disable Your Firewall dialog box appears for Windows Vista, as
shown in the following figures.
Figure 3-6  Firewall Detected dialog box (Windows XP)
Click Next to continue. The Searching dialog box appears (see Figure 3-8 Searching dialog box
on page 104).
102 Chapter 3   Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Figure 3-7  Disable Your Firewall dialog box (Windows Vista)
Click the Windows Firewall Settings... link to open the Windows Firewall Settings dialog
box. Select Off (not recommended), and then click OK to return to the Disable Your Firewall
dialog box, and then click Next to continue. The Searching dialog box appears, as shown in the
following figure.
NOTE: After installation is complete in Windows Vista, you will be prompted to re-enable the
firewall on the Finish dialog box.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions 103
Figure 3-8  Searching dialog box
NOTE: When installing the device over a network, allow the search for the first subnet in the
network to finish in order to find all available devices. After the first subnet is scanned for
available HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology devices, the results
appear in the Printers Found dialog box. However, the installer continues to search the
network for additional devices. The results of the first search usually takes place within 20
seconds. Subsequently, the search of the other subnets for the full list of devices occurs. The
results appear in the Printers Found dialog box (see Figure 3-11 Printers Found dialog box
on page 107).
NOTE: If the device does not appear, the installation process includes the option of using the
TCP/IP address for the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology, which
might be preferable to waiting for the installer to finish the search.
If no device is found during a network installation, the Printer Not Found dialog box appears for
Windows XP or Windows Vista, as shown in the following figures.
104 Chapter 3   Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Figure 3-9  Printer Not Found dialog box (Windows XP)
If this dialog box appears, the device might not be connected to the network. Ensure that the device is
connected and turned on. If a firewall is blocking the installation and you want the installer to open a
port through the firewall, click Next. The Check Printer Connection dialog box appears (see
Figure 3-16 Check Printer Connection dialog box on page 112).
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions 105
Figure 3-10  Printer Not Found dialog box (Windows Vista)
If this dialog box appears, the device might not be connected to the network. Ensure that the device is
connected and turned on. If a firewall is blocking the installation, click the Windows Firewall
Settings... link to open the Windows Firewall Settings dialog box. Select Off (not
recommended), and then click OK to return to the Printer Not Found dialog box, and then click
Next. The Check Printer Connection dialog box appears (see Figure 3-16 Check Printer
Connection dialog box on page 112).
If the software finds devices, the Printers Found dialog box appears, containing a list of matching
devices that have been found on the network, as shown in the following figure.
106 Chapter 3   Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Figure 3-11  Printers Found dialog box
Select the device to install and click Next. The Confirm Network Settings dialog box opens (see
Figure 3-13 Confirm Network Settings dialog box on page 109).
If the device to install is not listed and you know its TCP/IP address, click Search Again…. The
Check Printer Connection screen appears (see Figure 3-16 Check Printer Connection dialog box
on page 112).
If a single device is found, the Printer Found dialog box appears, containing a list of matching
devices on the network. The Printer Found dialog box is shown in the following figure.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions 107
Figure 3-12  Printer Found dialog box
To install a different device, select No, I want to install a different printer. and then click
Next. The Check Printer Connection dialog box opens, advising you to make sure the cable is
properly connected, and giving you the option of searching again for a network device or specifying a
device by address (see Figure 3-16 Check Printer Connection dialog box on page 112).
To install the device listed, select Yes, install this printer. and then click Next. The Confirm
Network Settings dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.
108 Chapter 3   Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Figure 3-13  Confirm Network Settings dialog box
In the Confirm Network Settings dialog box, click Next to continue the installation. The
Installation Type dialog box appears (see Figure 3-21 Installation Type dialog box on page 117).
If you click Change Settings…, the Confirm Change Setting dialog box opens, as shown in the
following figure.
WARNING! When the TCP/IP configuration is changed by using the Change Settings
button, the actual settings in the device change. Make changes to these settings only with the
advice of the system administrator.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions 109
Figure 3-14  Confirm Changing Setting dialog box
If you select Yes and click Next, the Change TCP/IP Settings dialog box opens (see Figure 3-15
Change TCP/IP Settings dialog box on page 111).
If you select No and click Next, the Installation Type dialog box appears (see Figure 3-21
Installation Type dialog box on page 117).
110 Chapter 3   Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Figure 3-15  Change TCP/IP Settings dialog box
If you change information in the IP Address:, Subnet Mask:, or Gateway: fields (without clicking
Next) and then click Suggest Settings…, the fields refresh with information that was found by the
installer and reported in the Printer Found screen.
Type a different TCP/IP Address, Subnet Mask, or Gateway address and then click Next to open the
Confirm Network Settings dialog box (see Figure 3-13 Confirm Network Settings dialog box
on page 109).
If you clear the Use Default Port Name check box and click Next, the Set Port Name dialog
box opens (see Figure 3-19 Set Port Name dialog box on page 115).
The Check Printer Connection dialog box, which appears when No, I want to install a
different printer. is selected in the Printer Found dialog box or if the system failed to detect the
device over the network, is shown in the following figure.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions 111
Figure 3-16  Check Printer Connection dialog box
If you select Search again for all available printers and then click Next, the Searching
dialog box opens (see Figure 3-8 Searching dialog box on page 104).
If you select Specify a printer by address and then click Next, the Specify Printer dialog box
opens. The Specify Printer dialog box is shown in the following figure.
If you select Enter settings for a printer not on the network. and then click Next, the
Printer Settings dialog box appears (see Figure 3-18 Printer Settings dialog box on page 114).
112 Chapter 3   Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Figure 3-17  Specify Printer dialog box
Specify a device by selecting one of the following options and typing the required information:
●
Hardware Address (MAC)
●
IP Address
●
IP Hostname
When you click Next, the Searching dialog box opens. When the search is finished, the Printer
Found dialog box opens (see Figure 3-12 Printer Found dialog box on page 108).
If you click Enter settings for a printer not on the network in the Check Printer
Connection dialog box and then click Next, the Printer Settings dialog box opens, as shown in
the following figure.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions 113
Figure 3-18  Printer Settings dialog box
To install the device by using the hardware address, select Hardware Address (MAC), type the
device hardware address in the field, and then click Next to continue the installation. The Set Port
Name dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure.
To install the device using the TCP/IP address, select IP Address, type the device TCP/IP address in
the field, and then click Next to continue the installation. The Set Port Name dialog box opens, as
shown in the following figure.
114 Chapter 3   Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Figure 3-19  Set Port Name dialog box
Accept the default port name, or type a port name in the Port Name: field and click Next to open
the Confirm Network Settings dialog box (see Figure 3-13 Confirm Network Settings dialog box
on page 109).
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions 115
Figure 3-20  Model dialog box
NOTE: The Model dialog box appears only during a software-first, direct connection
installation.
Select the device model, and then click Next to open the Installation Type dialog box.
116 Chapter 3   Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Figure 3-21  Installation Type dialog box
NOTE: For a USB Cable connection (a "direct connection" using a USB 2.0 cable), the
Typical with Fax Installation installation type is not available.
To view details about the installation types, click Details…. The Details dialog box appears, as
shown in the following figure.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions 117
Figure 3-22  Installation typeDetails dialog box
Click OK to return to the Installation Type dialog box.
118 Chapter 3   Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Select Typical Installation to install only the HP PCL 6 driver and screen fonts. If you select
Typical Installation and then click Next, the Ready to Install dialog box opens (see Figure 3-25
Ready to Install dialog box on page 121).
Select Typical with Fax Installation to install the HP PCL 6 driver, the HP MFP Send Fax driver,
and screen fonts. If you select Typical with Fax Installation and then click Next, the Ready to
Install dialog box opens (see Figure 3-25 Ready to Install dialog box on page 121).
If you select Custom Installation and then click Next, the Feature Selection dialog box opens,
as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-23  Feature Selection dialog box
An empty check box indicates that the feature is not installed. A check mark appears next to any driver
or document that is to be installed.
Information about the space required and the space available on the hard drive appears in the dialog
box.
Select any combination of features for the installer. It is possible to create a custom installer that installs
features without including a print driver. Select the drivers and support documents to install.
To view details about the features, click Details…. The Details dialog box appears, as shown in the
following figure.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions 119
Figure 3-24  Details dialog box
Click OK to return to the Feature Selection dialog box.
120 Chapter 3   Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
In the Feature Selection dialog box, click Next to continue the installation. The Ready to Install
dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-25  Ready to Install dialog box
Click Install to start the installation process.
Click Printer Properties to open the Printer Properties dialog box.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions 121
Figure 3-26  Printer Properties General tab
On the General tab, the device name can be changed by typing a new name in the Printer
Name: field.
Use the Location: and Comment: fields to describe the device, as appropriate.
To use the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology as the default device, select
the Use this as the default printer and select Yes in the drop-down menu. No is selected by
default.
If the device is being installed on a network and it will be shared among users, select Shared and
then click Yes in the drop-down menu. The device is not shared by default.
Click OK to return to the Ready to Install dialog box.
NOTE: If you share the device on Windows Vista, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, or
Windows 2000 operating systems, type a name. Additional print driver support for other
operating systems is also available.
If the device is not shared, additional driver support is not available.
In the Ready to Install dialog box, click Next to begin the process of copying and installing the
printing-system software folders and files. The Installation Status dialog box is shown in the
following figure.
122 Chapter 3   Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Figure 3-27  Installation Status dialog box
This dialog box remains on the screen until the installation is complete.
When the installation is complete, the Finish dialog box appears for Windows XP or Windows Vista,
as shown in the following figures.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions 123
Figure 3-28  Finish dialog box (Windows XP)
Click Finish to close the Finish dialog box and exit the installer.
NOTE: Depending on the type of installation and selected options, additional steps might
appear after you click Finish.
The HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Next Steps dialog box
appears (see Figure 3-30 HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Next Steps —
Congratulations dialog box on page 126).
124 Chapter 3   Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Figure 3-29  Finish dialog box (Windows Vista)
Click the Windows Firewall Settings... link to open the Windows Firewall Settings dialog
box. Select On (recommended), and then click OK to return to the Finish dialog box.
Click Finish to close the Finish dialog box and exit the installer.
NOTE: Depending on the type of installation and selected options, additional steps might
appear after you click Finish and you might be prompted to restart the computer.
The HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Next Steps dialog box
appears, as shown in the following figure.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions 125
Figure 3-30  HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Next Steps
— Congratulations dialog box
To verify that the device is connected, click Print Driver Test Page.
Figure 3-31  Test Page dialog box
If the test page prints correctly, click OK to continue. If it does not print, open the Printer Properties
tab and try to print another test page, or click Troubleshoot.
Modify a pre-existing installation
If an HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology has been previously installed, the
appearance of the main installation screen changes on the CD Browser, and the install-printer setting
126 Chapter 3   Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
changes to Modify Installation. A pre-existing installation also changes the sequence of installation
screens.
When you click Modify Installation on the main Windows installation CD Browser screen, the
Setup Maintenance dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-32  Setup Maintenance dialog box
Select the Add an additional printer or printer driver option and then click Next to add a
print driver other than the one that was added during the previous installation. When you select this
option, the installer discovers a list of available devices upon which to install the software, and a list
appears from which to choose the installation type.
Select the Add HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology software to
your system option and then click Next to add additional software, or to upgrade drivers you have
previously installed on the system. When you select this option, the installer does not perform discovery
of the previous installation. The options that appear are the same as those that appear when the
original installation was performed (see Figure 3-24 Details dialog box on page 120).
Select the Remove all HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology
software or drivers from your system option and then click Next. The Ready to Remove
dialog box appears, a shown in the following figure.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions 127
Figure 3-33  Ready to Remove dialog box
Click Remove to uninstall the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology printingsystem software. The Un-installation Status dialog box appears and remains on the screen until
the uninstallation is complete.
When the uninstallation is complete, the Finish dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure.
128 Chapter 3   Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Figure 3-34  Uninstallation Finish dialog box
Click Finish to close the Finish dialog box and exit the installer.
Install drivers by using Add Printer
If the computer is running a 64-bit MS Windows operating system, install the corresponding 64-bit
driver. The 64-bit drivers are included on the software CD-ROM. Use the following steps to install a
driver by using the Add Printer Wizard.
1.
Insert the Windows installation CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
Go to the Add Printer feature in MS Windows.
In Windows XP, click Start on the desktop, click Settings, and then click Printers and
Faxes. The Printers and Faxes window appears. Click Add Printer. The Add Printer
Wizard screen appears.
In Windows 2000, click Start on the desktop, click Settings, click Printers, and then click
Add Printer. The Add Printer Wizard screen appears.
3.
ENWW
Use the Add Printer Wizard to find and connect to the device.
Print-driver installation instructions 129
4.
Select the Have disk option on the Install Printer Software screen, and navigate to one of
the driver files on the Windows software CD in Windows Vista, Windows 2000, Windows XP,
or Windows Server 2003:
To install the HP PCL 6 driver, select the following file:
●
\Drivers\<operating system>\PCL6\hpc8060u.inf
To install the HP PCL 5 driver, select the following file:
●
\Drivers\<operating system>\PCL5\hpc8060t.inf
To install the PS Emulation driver, select the following file:
●
\Drivers\<operating system>\PS\hpc8060v.inf
To install the HP MFP Send Fax driver, select the following file:
●
For 32-bit: \Driver\<your operating system>\SendFax\hpc4730e.inf
For 64-bit: \Driver\<operating system>\SendFax\hpc4730w.inf
5.
Complete the wizard steps. The driver is installed as part of the process.
Installer Customization Wizard for Windows
System administrators can use the Installer Customization Wizard to customize the HP CM8060/
CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology installer by preconfiguring the installation options in a
response file. To start the utility, click Optional Software on the main menu of the Windows
software CD Browser, and then click Installer Customization Wizard.
NOTE: For detailed information about the Installer Customization Wizard, see the
Installer Customization Wizard Administrator's Guide, which is available on the System
Administrator's CD.
Topics:
●
Run the Installer Customization Wizard
●
Dialog boxes
●
Distribution
Run the Installer Customization Wizard
The Installer Customization Wizard runs from the Windows software installation CD. It runs
separately from the common Microsoft Installer (MSI), and has its own interface.
Running the Installer Customization Wizard produces one installation package and a response
file (RESPONSE.INI) for a single-system installation. The installation package might work for multiple
systems that have the same response information, or the RESPONSE.INI file can be directly edited for
system-configuration differences. The HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide provides the exact text
for replacing entries in the RESPONSE.INI file.
130 Chapter 3   Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
To run the Installer Customization Wizard
1.
Insert the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Windows software CD
into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
On the CD Browser main screen, click Optional Software.
3.
Click Installer Customization Wizard.
4.
Follow the instructions in the dialog boxes to complete the installer customization.
Dialog boxes
NOTE: If you are installing the printing-system software on a system that runs a non-supported
default language, a Language Selection dialog box appears. Select any other language
that is available on the Windows installation CD by clicking the down arrow on the drop-down
menu, and then click OK to initiate the printing-system setup. The Welcome to the HP
CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Installation
Customization Wizard dialog box appears.
The Welcome to the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology
Installation Customization Wizard dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-35  Welcome to the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline
Technology Installation Customization Wizard dialog box
Click Next. The Software License Agreement dialog box appears , as shown in the following
figure.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions 131
Figure 3-36  Software License Agreement dialog box
To cancel the installation, click Cancel on this or any other screen where it appears (see Help, Back,
Next, and Cancel buttons on page 97).
Read the software-license agreement, select I agree, and then click Next to open the Language
dialog box , as shown in the following figure.
132 Chapter 3   Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Figure 3-37  Language dialog box
Select the language in which the customization package will be installed. The language selection is
recorded in the response file.
NOTE: After installation, the language used in the driver is limited to the one that was
selected in the Language dialog box during installation. Maintenance mode does not provide
options for changing the language.
To change the language on a system that used an Installer Customization Wizard installation,
uninstall the software, and then install a new device in order to restore the option to install other
languages.
Click Next to open the Printer Port dialog box, as shown in the following figure.
Click Back on this or any screen where it appears to return to a previous screen.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions 133
Figure 3-38  Printer Port dialog box
Select Network Path to make the text field available for a queue-name entry. If you select
Network Path and click Browse..., the Browse for Printer dialog box opens.
Figure 3-39  Browse for Printer dialog box
134 Chapter 3   Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Navigate to a device and click OK to record the path in the Network Path field in the Printer
Port dialog box. Click Cancel to close the Browse for Printer dialog box.
Type a network path or use the Browse for Printer dialog box to complete the Network Path
field, and then click Next to open the Model dialog box (see Figure 3-43 Model dialog box
on page 137).
In the Printer Port dialog box, select Local (direct connect) port and then click Next to open
the Model dialog box (see Figure 3-43 Model dialog box on page 137).
In the Printer Port dialog box, select New TCP/IP Port and then click Next to open the Specify
TCP/IP Port dialog box. This dialog box includes all custom network ports that are available on the
local system. To use any custom network port for the customized installer, the port must be created
identically on the system where it will be used.
Figure 3-40  Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box
Select IP Address: to make the field available for typing the TCP/IP address for the device. Only
numerals are allowed in this field. If this option is selected, type at least one digit in the IP Address
field to prevent an error message from appearing and prompting for a valid IP address.
Select IP Hostname to make the field available for typing the IP hostname for the device. Any
characters are allowed in this field, but an error message appears if spaces are included in the field. If
this option is selected, type at least one character in the IP Hostname field to prevent an error
message from appearing and prompting for a valid IP hostname.
Select Hardware Address to make the field available for typing the hardware address of the
device. Any characters are allowed in this field, but the entry is limited to 12 characters. If this option
is selected, type at least one character in the Hardware Address field to prevent an error message
from appearing and prompting for a valid hardware address.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions 135
After selecting any of the options, type the appropriate name or address and then click Next. The
Model dialog box opens (see Figure 3-43 Model dialog box on page 137).
For each of the options in the Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box, either use the default port name, as
specified in each of the three options, or specify a different name.
To use the default port name, select Use Default and click Next. To specify a different name, click
Specify, type a port name, and click Next. The Port Creation Options dialog box appears.
Figure 3-41  Port Creation Options dialog box
Select No, do no create the port (the printer will not be installed) if you do not want to
create a port.
If you select Yes, create the port, type the device hardware address in the Hardware Address
field and then click Next to open the Model dialog box.
If you click Next without typing a hardware address, a network setup error message appears, as
shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-42  Please enter a Hardware address.: Network Setup Error dialog box
136 Chapter 3   Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
NOTE: To print a configuration page to see the hardware address, see Print the configuration
page on page 275.
Figure 3-43  Model dialog box
Select the device model and click Next. The Drivers dialog box appears.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions 137
Figure 3-44  Drivers dialog box
Any combination of features can be selected for the installer, and none depends on any other
selection. It is possible to create a custom installer that installs features without including a print driver.
Select the drivers to install.
To view details about the drivers, click Details…. The driver Details dialog box appears.
138 Chapter 3   Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Figure 3-45  Driver Details dialog box
All of the drivers that are available on the Drivers dialog box are described in the Details dialog
box. Click OK to return to the Drivers dialog box.
On the Drivers dialog box, select one or more drivers, and click Next to continue the installation.
The Driver Configuration dialog box appears.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions 139
Figure 3-46  Driver Configuration dialog box
To preconfigure the driver settings, select Yes, allow me to configure the drivers, and click
Next. The Driver Configuration dialog box changes to show two tabs:
●
Printing Preferences
●
Device Settings
These tabs are shown in the following figures.
140 Chapter 3   Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Figure 3-47  Printing Preferences tab
Figure 3-48  Device Settings tab
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions 141
Select the settings on each tab. For each setting, a drop-down menu appears that lists the options. If
the setting can be locked, a Lock check box appears beside the drop-down arrow. For example, the
Print on Both Sides (Duplex) setting can be locked to ensure that users use double-sided printing.
In some instances, an Invalid Selection message might appear. For example, when Left Edge
Binding is selected for the Booklet Printing option, an error message appears, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 3-49  Invalid Selection dialog box
When the settings have been selected, click Next to continue the installation.
The Additional Software dialog appears.
Figure 3-50  Additional Software dialog box
To view details about the additional software, click Details. The additional software Details dialog
box appears.
142 Chapter 3   Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Figure 3-51  Additional software Details dialog box
All the software selected in the Additional Software dialog box is described in the Details dialog
box. Click OK to return to the Additional Software dialog box.
In the Additional Software dialog box, click Next to open the Custom Installer Location
dialog box, which is shown in the following figure.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions 143
Figure 3-52  Custom Installer Location dialog box
Use the Location: text field to type a location in which to save the custom installer. The field is large,
but is limited as to the number of characters that it can accommodate.
To change the location of the custom installer, click Browse…, navigate to the appropriate folder in
which to save the custom installer, and click OK to return to the Custom Installer Location dialog
box.
Click Next to open the Ready to Create Installer dialog box, which is shown in the following
figure.
144 Chapter 3   Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Figure 3-53  Ready to Create Installer dialog box
NOTE:
The location for the installer package defaults to c:\<name of printer>.
NOTE: During installation, several files, including system files, are placed at the root of the
directory that appears in the Location field. Make sure that enough space is available on the
directory before continuing.
Click Printer Properties to open the Printer Properties dialog box.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions 145
Figure 3-54  Printer Properties General tab
NOTE: Click any of the device properties to make the field available for typing or to see the
drop-down menu selections.
On the General tab, change the device name by typing a new name in the Printer Name field.
Use the Location and Comment fields to describe the device, or leave these fields blank.
To use the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology as the default device, select
Yes in the Use this as the default printer drop-down menu.
To share the device over a network, select Yes in the Shared drop-down menu. The default setting is
No.
Click OK to return to the Ready to Create Installer dialog box.
In the Ready to Create Installer dialog box, click Next to begin the process of copying and
installing the printing-system software folders and files. The Installing dialog box is shown in the
following figure.
146 Chapter 3   Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
Figure 3-55  Installing dialog box
This dialog box remains on the screen until the status bar fills.
Click Cancel to close the Installer Customization Wizard without creating the customized printingsystem software package.
When the creation is complete, the Finish dialog box appears, as shown in the following figure.
ENWW
Print-driver installation instructions 147
Figure 3-56  Finish dialog box
Click Finish to close the Finish dialog box and exit the Installer Customization Wizard.
Distribution
The installation package is now ready for distribution. It is the same as the package on the Windows
printing-system CD, except that it is limited to one language, and it contains the selected features and
options. To install the custom installation package, run the SETUP.EXE file from the root of the package.
For detailed information, see the HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide, which is available on the
System Administrator's CD.
Point-and-Print installation for Windows Vista, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003
Use the following information to install a print driver by using the Microsoft Point-and-Print feature when
you do not connect directly to the device on the network.
Point and Print is a Microsoft term that describes a two-step driver installation process. The first step is
to install a shared driver on a network print server. The second step is to "point" to the print server
from a network client so that the client can use the print driver.
This section outlines the procedures for installing print drivers by using Point and Print. If these
procedures are not successful, contact Microsoft. HP provides print drivers that are compatible with the
Point-and-Print feature, but this is a function of the MS Windows operating systems, not of HP print
drivers.
Administrator privileges are necessary to install the print driver on a Windows Vista, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 operating system.
148 Chapter 3   Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
In a homogenous operating system environment (one in which all of the clients and servers are running
in the same operating system), the same print driver version that is vended from the server to the clients
in a Point and Print environment also runs and controls the print queue configuration on the server.
However, in a mixed operating system environment (one in which servers and clients might run on
different operating systems), conflicts can occur when client computers run a version of the print driver
that is different from the one on the print server.
In an effort to increase operating system stability, Microsoft determined that, starting with
Windows 2000 and continuing with all future operating systems, print drivers would run as user-mode
processes. User-mode drivers run in a protected part of the operating system, as do all of the normal
end-user processes and software programs. A user-mode print driver that functions incorrectly can
terminate (or “crash”) only the process in which it is running—not the whole operating system. Because
access to critical system resources is restricted, overall operating system stability is increased.
Set a default printer
This section applies to the Windows Vista, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and
Windows 2000 operating systems.
1.
Click Start.
2.
For Windows 2000, select Settings, and then click Printers.
For Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003, click Printers and Faxes.
For Windows XP Home, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Printers and Faxes
icon.
ENWW
3.
Right-click the driver name.
4.
Click Set As Default. A check mark appears next to the menu option.
Print-driver installation instructions 149
Fax-driver installation instructions
Use the HP MFP Send Fax driver software to send fax jobs from the computer to the device over a
network. The fax driver is installed on the client computer.
This STR provides information about the HP MFP Send Fax driver that is used with the HP Analog Fax
Accessory when it is installed in the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology.
The following operating systems support this driver:
●
Windows Vista
●
Windows XP
●
Windows Server 2003
●
Windows 2000
For additional information, see the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology
System Administrator Guide, which is available on the System Administrator's CD.
Topics:
●
Minimum firmware
●
Install the HP MFP Send Fax driver on MS Windows
Minimum firmware
The HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology requires firmware support for the HP
MFP Send Fax driver. To support the driver, the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline
Technology must have the minimum firmware version installed. To determine if the HP CM8060/
CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology has a minimum supporting firmware version, print a
configuration page from the control panel to check the firmware datecode, and verify that the PC Send
Fax menu item appears on the control panel.
To print a configuration page:
1.
Touch Administration.
2.
Touch Information.
3.
Touch Configuration Page.
4.
Touch Print.
The firmware datecode is listed in the Device Information section of the configuration page.
To ensure the PC Send Fax menu item is enabled:
1.
On the control panel, touch Administration.
2.
Scroll to and touch Initial Setup.
3.
Scroll to and touch Fax Setup.
4.
Scroll to and touch PC Fax Send. If PC Fax Send does not appear, update the firmware.
150 Chapter 3   Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
5.
Touch Enabled.
6.
Touch Save.
To update the firmware, see Remote firmware updates on page 274. After the firmware is updated, or
if the firmware is already current, install the HP MFP Send Fax driver.
Install the HP MFP Send Fax driver on MS Windows
To install the fax driver, follow the instructions in Print-driver installation instructions on page 96. Select
the Typical with Fax Installation installation type, or select the Custom Installation installation
type and select the HP MFP Send Fax Driver as part of the custom installation.
ENWW
Fax-driver installation instructions 151
152 Chapter 3   Install MS Windows printing-system components
ENWW
4
HP MFP Send Fax driver
Introduction
If an optional analog fax accessory is installed in the device, and the device is connected to an analog
phone line, you can use the device to send and receive faxes. If an analog fax accessory is not
installed, you can send faxes by using a LAN fax service or an Internet fax service.
NOTE:
If an analog fax accessory is not installed, the device cannot receive faxes.
Use the HP MFP Send Fax driver to send faxes from a computer to one or more network-connected
devices. Access the HP MFP Send Fax driver by printing from an application and selecting the
appropriate driver in the Print dialog box:
●
HP CM8060 MFP with Edgeline Fax for the HP CM8060 Color MFP with Edgeline
Technology
●
HP CM8050 MFP with Edgeline Fax for the HP CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline
Technology
Other settings for the driver are available by accessing the driver settings.
This STR describes the settings that are available for the HP MFP Send Fax driver. These settings are
located on the control tabs, the controls, and the control dialog boxes that are displayed through the
driver Properties tabs, the Printing Preferences tabs, the Printing Defaults tabs, and the
Document Properties tabs.
Most of the tabs and settings available on these driver dialog boxes are standard Windows print
settings and selections. Only the settings and selections specific to the HP MFP Send Fax driver are
covered.
Topics:
●
Access to the HP MFP Send Fax driver
●
Help system
●
Driver Properties tabs features
●
Printing Preferences, Printing Defaults, and Document Properties tabs features
NOTE: For information about sending faxes directly from the device control panel, see the HP
CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology System Administrator Guide, which is
available on the System Administrator's CD.
ENWW
Introduction 153
Access to the HP MFP Send Fax driver
Topics:
●
Driver Properties tabs
●
Printing Preferences tabs
●
Printing Defaults tabs
●
Document Properties tabs
Driver Properties tabs
These tabs controls the driver behavior and driver connections. To gain access to the driver
Properties tabs:
1.
Click Start.
2.
For Windows 2000, select Settings, and then click Printers.
For Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003, click Printers and Faxes.
For Windows XP Home, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Printers and Faxes
icon.
3.
Right-click the driver name.
4.
Click Properties.
The following Properties fax-driver control tabs are available:
●
General
●
Sharing
●
Ports
●
Advanced
●
Color Management
●
Security
●
Device Settings
●
About
In addition to the driver Properties tabs, three other tab sets are associated with the HP MFP Send
Fax driver:
●
Printing Preferences tabs
●
Printing Defaults tabs
●
Document Properties tabs
The tab sets look identical, but have different uses. The following table describes the function of each
of the tab sets.
154 Chapter 4   HP MFP Send Fax driver
ENWW
Table 4-1  Printing Defaults, Printing Preferences, Document Properties
Tab set title
Description
Printing Preferences
Use the control tabs to set the default values that apply to the
local user of the HP MFP Send Fax driver
Printing Defaults
Use the control tabs to set the default values that apply to all
sharing users of the HP MFP Send Fax driver (for example,
through a shared device)
Document Properties
Control-tab settings apply to the software program only;
changes are lost after the software program is closed
The Printing Preferences tabs, the Printing Defaults tabs, and the Document Properties tabs
have the same three control tab sets:
●
Advanced
●
Paper/Quality
●
Services
Printing Preferences tabs
To gain access to the Printing Preferences tabs:
1.
Click Start.
2.
For Windows 2000, select Settings, and then click Printers.
For Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003, click Printers and Faxes.
For Windows XP Home, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Printers and Faxes
icon.
3.
Right-click the driver name.
4.
Click Printing Preferences....
OR
1.
From within most software programs, click File.
2.
Click Print.
3.
In the printer drop-down list, select the driver name.
4.
Click Printing Preferences.
The appearance and names of the fax driver tabs can vary, depending on the operating system.
ENWW
Access to the HP MFP Send Fax driver 155
Printing Defaults tabs
To gain access to the Printing Defaults tabs:
1.
Click Start.
2.
For Windows 2000, select Settings, and then click Printers.
For Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003, click Printers and Faxes.
For Windows XP Home, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Printers and Faxes
icon.
3.
Right-click the driver name.
4.
Click Properties.
5.
Click the Advanced tab.
6.
Click the Printing Defaults button.
The appearance and names of the fax driver tabs can vary, depending on the operating system.
Document Properties tabs
To gain access to the Document Properties tabs:
1.
From within most software programs, click File.
2.
Click Print.
3.
In the printer drop-down list, select the driver name.
4.
Click Properties.
The appearance and names of the fax driver tabs can vary, depending on the operating system. These
driver settings apply while the software program is open.
156 Chapter 4   HP MFP Send Fax driver
ENWW
Help system
The HP MFP Send Fax driver includes a full-featured Help system to provide assistance with printing
and configuration options.
Windows provides a Help system that gives basic information about a setting or function on the driver
Properties control tabs and associated dialog boxes. Because this help information is not customized
for the HP MFP Send Fax driver, the descriptions might be more applicable for print programs than to
the HP MFP Send Fax driver.
What's this? Help
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows 2000 support What's this? Help. You can
gain access to What's this? Help messages in any of the following ways:
●
Right-click a control and then click What's this?. A pop-up Help window appears.
●
Click the ? button in the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an
arrow with a question mark. When you use this special cursor to select a control, the pop-up Help
window for that feature appears.
●
Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the selected control appears.
Context-sensitive Help
Click the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box to see a context-sensitive Help message.
ENWW
Help system 157
Driver Properties tabs features
Topics:
●
General tab
●
Sharing tab
●
Ports tab
●
Advanced tab
●
Device Settings tab
●
About tab
General tab
To gain access to the General tab:
1.
Click Start.
2.
For Windows 2000, select Settings, and then click Printers.
For Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003, click Printers and Faxes.
For Windows XP Home, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Printers and Faxes
icon.
3.
Right-click the driver name.
4.
Click Properties.
5.
Click the General tab.
The General tab provides the following controls for the HP MFP Send Fax driver:
●
Change the driver name in the box next to the device icon.
●
Specify the physical location of the device in the Location: field. This location appears in the
Printers and Faxes folder.
●
Type a comment about the device in the Comment: field.
●
Click the Printing Preferences... button to open the Printing Preferences control tabs.
●
Click the Print Test Page button to open the HP MFP Send Fax driver user interface for sending
a fax.
158 Chapter 4   HP MFP Send Fax driver
ENWW
Sharing tab
To gain access to the Sharing tab:
1.
Click Start.
2.
For Windows 2000, select Settings, and then click Printers.
For Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003, click Printers and Faxes.
For Windows XP Home, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Printers and Faxes
icon.
3.
Right-click the driver name.
4.
Click Properties.
5.
Click the Sharing tab.
The Sharing tab provides the following controls for the HP MFP Send Fax driver:
●
Click Share this printer to share the HP MFP Send Fax driver. Type the Share Name to
enable this feature.
●
Click Additional Drivers to share the HP MFP Send Fax driver in other operating-system
environments. (Only Windows XP and x64 Windows XP/Windows Server 2003/
Windows 2000.)
Ports tab
To gain access to the Ports tab:
1.
Click Start.
2.
For Windows 2000, select Settings, and then click Printers.
For Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003, click Printers and Faxes.
For Windows XP Home, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Printers and Faxes
icon.
3.
Right-click the driver name.
4.
Click Properties.
5.
Click the Ports tab.
The Ports tab provides the following controls for the HP MFP Send Fax driver:
ENWW
●
Modify the HP MFP Send Fax driver port by clicking Add Port, Delete Port, or Configure
Port.
●
Click Enable printer pooling to allow the HP Send Fax job to be sent to multiple devices.
Driver Properties tabs features 159
Advanced tab
To gain access to the Advanced tab:
1.
Click Start.
2.
For Windows 2000, select Settings, and then click Printers.
For Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003, click Printers and Faxes.
For Windows XP Home, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Printers and Faxes
icon.
3.
Right-click the driver name.
4.
Click Properties.
5.
Click the Advanced tab.
The Advanced tab provides the following controls for the HP MFP Send Fax driver:
●
Click Always Available to send the Send Fax job immediately (default).
●
Click Available from to hold the Send Fax job in the spooler during an unavailable time span.
The Send Fax job is released during an available time span.
Configure the available time span by clicking the up and down arrows next to the time fields.
●
Click the New Driver button to update the existing HP MFP Send Fax driver. See Upgrade the
HP MFP Send Fax driver on page 160 for more information.
●
Ensure that the following default spooler settings are selected:
●
Spool print documents so program finishes printing faster
●
Start printing immediately
●
Print spooled documents first
●
Enable advanced printing features
NOTE: The spooler settings are active and should not be changed from the default
settings for the HP MFP Send Fax driver.
1.
Click the Printing Defaults button to open the Printing Defaults dialog box.
2.
Click the Print Processor button to open the Print Processor dialog box. Do not change the
default settings.
3.
Click the Separator Page button to create a separator page for the fax job.
NOTE: The Separator Page feature is not supported for the HP MFP Send Fax driver.
Upgrade the HP MFP Send Fax driver
Use this method of upgrading the HP MFP Send Fax driver to retain the phone book that was
established in an earlier HP MFP Send Fax driver version.
160 Chapter 4   HP MFP Send Fax driver
ENWW
NOTE:
The newer versions of the HP MFP Send Fax driver has a phone book export feature.
To update the HP MFP Send Fax driver:
1.
Click Start.
2.
For Windows 2000, select Settings, and then click Printers.
For Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003, click Printers and Faxes.
For Windows XP Home, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Printers and Faxes
icon.
3.
Right-click the driver name.
4.
Click Properties.
5.
Click the Advanced tab.
6.
Click New Driver and follow the instructions in the Add Printer Driver Wizard. (See Install
drivers by using Add Printer on page 129.)
Device Settings tab
To gain access to the Device Settings tab:
1.
Click Start.
2.
For Windows 2000, select Settings, and then click Printers.
For Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003, click Printers and Faxes.
For Windows XP Home, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Printers and Faxes
icon.
3.
Right-click the driver name.
4.
Click Properties.
5.
Click Device Settings.
The following figure shows the Device Settings tab.
ENWW
Driver Properties tabs features 161
Figure 4-1  Device Settings tab
The Device Settings tab provides the following control for the HP MFP Send Fax driver:
●
Installable Options. Use the Automatic Configuration pull-down menu to perform an
Update Now function.
The HP MFP Send Fax driver queries the device for any setting or configuration changes.
Normally, this is not required because the driver will automatically perform this function each time
the driver is opened.
The default setting is Off. After an automatic configuration is performed, the setting returns to Off.
About tab
To gain access to the About tab:
1.
Click Start.
2.
For Windows 2000, select Settings, and then click Printers.
For Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003, click Printers and Faxes.
For Windows XP Home, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Printers and Faxes
icon.
162 Chapter 4   HP MFP Send Fax driver
ENWW
3.
Right-click the driver name.
4.
Click Properties.
5.
Click the About tab.
The About tab provides detailed information about the HP MFP Send Fax driver. It contains an overall
build number (in parenthesis after the model name) together with specific information about each of the
components. The following figure shows the About tab.
Figure 4-2  About tab
The About tab lists driver installation file names and their version numbers. The About tab also
indicates whether the administrator preferences have been set, the date that the driver was last
configured, and whether the configuration is default or user-defined.
ENWW
Driver Properties tabs features 163
To determine the latest version, compare the overall build number (in parenthesis after the model
name) and the GPD number (in the Driver Files: field). If the overall build number has increased, this is
the latest version of the driver.
If the overall build number is the same, check the version number of the GPD file. The driver that has
the highest GPD version number is the latest driver.
164 Chapter 4   HP MFP Send Fax driver
ENWW
Printing Preferences, Printing Defaults, and
Document Properties tabs features
For information about accessing each of these tabs, see Access to the HP MFP Send Fax driver
on page 154.
Topics:
●
Advanced tab
●
Paper/Quality tab
●
Services tab
Advanced tab
To gain access to the Advanced tab:
1.
Click Start.
2.
For Windows 2000, select Settings, and then click Printers.
For Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003, click Printers and Faxes.
For Windows XP Home, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Printers and Faxes
icon.
3.
Right-click the driver name.
4.
Click Printing Preferences.
5.
Click the Advanced tab.
Use the Advanced tab to change the layout of printed pages and to configure special controls that
are not commonly used. Also use this tab to control print-driver features such as paper size and number
of copies (although most current software programs support these features in the print dialog box or
through the page settings in the software program).
The following figure shows the Advanced tab.
ENWW
Printing Preferences, Printing Defaults, and Document Properties tabs features 165
Figure 4-3  Advanced tab
The Advanced tab contains the following controls:
●
Paper/Output
●
Document Options
Paper/Output
The Paper/Output control contains the following settings:
●
Copy Count
●
Collated check box (becomes available and can be changed when the Copy Count setting is
greater than 1)
NOTE:
setting.
When changing control settings, click the setting to see the drop-down list for that
166 Chapter 4   HP MFP Send Fax driver
ENWW
Copy Count
Copy Count specifies the number of copies to print. For the HP MFP Send Fax driver, additional fax
jobs will be sent if the number of copies is changed to any number greater than 1. The default setting
is 1.
Collated
The Collated check box is visible when the Copy Count setting is selected. The check box becomes
available and can be changed when the Copy Count setting is greater than 1.
NOTE:
The Collated setting is not applicable to the HP MFP Send Fax driver.
Document Options
The Document Options control contains the following settings:
●
Advanced Printing Features
●
Printer Features
●
Layout Options
Advanced Printing Features
These settings are not applicable to the HP MFP Send Fax driver. The Advanced Printing Features
setting should be Enabled by default.
Paper/Quality tab
To gain access to the Paper/Quality tab:
1.
Click Start.
2.
For Windows 2000, select Settings, and then click Printers.
For Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003, click Printers and Faxes.
For Windows XP Home, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Printers and Faxes
icon.
3.
Right-click the driver name.
4.
Click Printing Preferences.
5.
Click Paper/Quality.
Use the Paper/Quality tab to specify the size, and orientation of the paper. These will be applied to
Send Fax jobs.
The following figure shows the Paper/Quality tab.
ENWW
Printing Preferences, Printing Defaults, and Document Properties tabs features 167
Figure 4-4  Paper/Quality tab
The Paper/Quality tab contains the following control sets:
●
Print Task Quick Sets
●
Paper Options
●
Document preview image
●
Orientation
Print Task Quick Sets
The first group box in the upper portion of the Paper/Quality tab is Print Task Quick Sets. Use
the Print Task Quick Sets setting to store the current combination of driver settings. Print Task
Quick Sets are either preset by system-administrator settings or user-defined printing specifications
(such as paper size). The Print Task Quick Sets setting does not appear on the driver Properties
page.
168 Chapter 4   HP MFP Send Fax driver
ENWW
NOTE: System administrators can predefine Print Task Quick Sets for users. These
administrator Print Task Quick Sets are defined on the server and are available to users,
but usually cannot be modified by users. Users can also define Print Task Quick Sets.
The following selection is available in the Print Task Quick Sets drop-down menu:
●
Default Print Settings
Default Print Settings
When Default Print Settings is selected, nearly all of the settings are restored to the combination
that existed after the driver was installed (the original settings). However, if the attribute combinations
that are associated with the other quick sets have been changed or deleted, the original settings for
those items are not restored.
Type a new Quick Set name here appears in the Print Task Quick Sets menu automatically
if no other driver settings have been changed since the driver was installed, or if all of the driver
settings match the original settings. Otherwise, the setting in the Print Task Quick Sets menu is the
same label that appeared when the printing Properties dialog was last closed by clicking OK.
When Default Print Settings is selected, the following defaults are restored:
●
Paper Options — Size is: Letter
●
Orientation — Portrait
By default, the Print Task Quick Sets menu is set to Default Print Settings. When you any of
the default settings are changed and you want to save the configuration as a Print Task Quick Set,
highlight the words Default Print Settings, type the name for the new Print Task Quick Set, and
then click Save. Print Task Quick Sets are saved in the system registry. To delete a Print Task Quick
Set, select it from the drop-down menu and click Delete.
NOTE: Store a maximum of 25 Print Task Quick Sets on a particular system. If you attempt to
save more, the following message appears: There are too many Print Task Quick Sets
defined. Please delete some before adding new ones.
Paper Options
The settings specified in the Paper Options group on the Paper/Quality tab apply to all of the
pages of the document.
The following setting is available in the Paper Options group box:
●
Size is:
Size is:
The Size is: setting is a drop-down menu that lists all of the supported paper sizes.
Move the cursor over the dimensions label to change the cursor from an arrow to a gloved hand. Click
the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units.
Because paper-size settings in most software programs override print-driver settings, it is generally best
to use the driver to set paper size only when printing from software programs that do not include a
paper-size setting, such as NotePad.
ENWW
Printing Preferences, Printing Defaults, and Document Properties tabs features 169
The paper size is applied to the HP Send Fax job and no printing occurs.
For information about paper sizes, see Paper attributes on page 289 in this STR.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up.
Move the cursor over the document preview image to change the cursor from an arrow to a gloved
hand. Toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image.
Orientation
Orientation refers to the layout of the image on the page, and does not affect the way that paper feeds
into the device. Specify the orientation of the fax job. The two available orientations are portrait and
landscape. The default orientation is Portrait.
NOTE: Nearly all software programs establish the orientation for the page, so the page
orientation in the driver is useful only for the few software programs that do not set an
orientation.
The Orientation group box contains two options:
●
Portrait. The top edge of the document is the shorter edge of the paper.
●
Landscape. The top edge of the document is the longer edge of the paper.
Click the document preview image to toggle orientation between portrait and landscape.
Services tab
To gain access to the Services tab:
1.
Click Start.
2.
For Windows 2000, select Settings, and then click Printers.
For Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003, click Printers and Faxes.
For Windows XP Home, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Printers and Faxes
icon.
3.
Right-click the driver name.
4.
Click Printing Preferences.
5.
Click Services.
The Services tab is shown in the following figure.
170 Chapter 4   HP MFP Send Fax driver
ENWW
Figure 4-5  Services tab
The Services tab contains the following links:
●
Device and Supplies Status
●
Launch Embedded Web Server
NOTE: The Services tab options appear only if the HP MFP Send Fax driver is connected to
a valid TCP/IP port.
Device and Supplies Status
Click the Device and Supplies Status icon to open the Device Status screen of the HP EWS.
Launch Embedded Web Server
Click the Launch Embedded Web Server icon to open the HP EWS.
ENWW
Printing Preferences, Printing Defaults, and Document Properties tabs features 171
172 Chapter 4   HP MFP Send Fax driver
ENWW
5
HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and
PS Emulation drivers for MS
Windows
Introduction
This STR describes the features of the HP PCL 6 driver, the HP PCL 5 driver, and the
HP Postscript 3 Emulation driver (PS Emulation driver) for Windows Vista (32-bit and 64-bit),
Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit), and Windows 2000.
Control print jobs from any of several places:
●
Software-program print-dialog box
●
Print-driver user interface
●
Device control panel (sets defaults, but does not provide access to all settings)
●
HP Web Jetadmin (sets defaults, but does not provide access to all settings)
Generally, for features that are duplicated (for instance, select the paper input tray), settings that are
established in the software program override print-driver settings. Print-driver settings, in turn, override
device control-panel settings.
When installing the print-system software in Windows Vista, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or
Windows Server 2003, the HP PCL 6 driver is installed by default. The HP PCL 5 and
PS Emulation drivers can be installed by performing a Custom Installation.
The following sections describe the options that are available on each tab of the HP PCL 6, PCL 5,
and PS Emulation drivers.
This STR also describes differences between the HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers. Unless
otherwise noted, the features that are described apply to all three.
Topics:
ENWW
●
Access to print drivers in Windows Vista, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and
Windows 2000
●
Help system
●
Advanced tab features
●
Printing Shortcuts tab features
Introduction 173
●
Paper/Quality tab features
●
Effects tab features
●
Finishing tab features
●
Output tab features
●
Job Storage tab features
●
Color tab features
●
Services tab features
●
Device Settings tab features
●
About tab features
174 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Access to print drivers in Windows Vista,
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and
Windows 2000
Depending on the operating system on which the print drivers are installed, there are several ways to
gain access to the print drivers and different print-driver interfaces:
●
Software-program print-dialog box
●
Print-driver user interface
●
Device control panel
Software-program print-dialog box
To gain access to the print-driver settings from within most software programs:
1.
Click File.
2.
Click Print.
3.
Click Properties.
The appearance and names of the driver tabs can vary, depending on the operating system. These
driver settings apply only while that software program is open.
Print-driver user interface
Control the drivers directly from the Printers folder through the two sets of driver tabs: the Printing
Preferences tabs and the Properties tabs. The settings on the Printing Preferences driver tabs
control the driver default settings for each user's profile. Configure installable options on the
Properties driver tabs.
Printing Preferences driver tabs
The Printing Preferences driver tabs change the default settings that are used across all software
programs. To gain access to these tabs:
1.
Click Start.
2.
For Windows 2000, select Settings, and then click Printers.
For Windows Vista, Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003, click Printers and
Faxes.
For Windows XP Home, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Printers and Faxes
icon.
ENWW
3.
Right-click the driver name.
4.
Click Printing Preferences.
Access to print drivers in Windows Vista, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and 175
Windows 2000
The following Printing Preferences print-driver tabs are available:
●
Advanced
●
Printing Shortcuts
●
Paper/Quality
●
Effects
●
Finishing
●
Output
●
Job Storage
●
Color
●
Services
All of these tabs are device-specific.
The Job Storage tab is available only when the Job Storage setting is Enabled on the Device
Settings tab in the Properties print-driver tabs. To make the settings take effect, click OK on the
Device Settings tab.
The Output tab is available only when an output device is connected to the HP CM8060/CM8050
Color MFP with Edgeline Technology.
Properties driver tabs
This set of tabs controls the driver behavior and driver connections. To gain access to the Properties
tabs:
1.
Click Start.
2.
For Windows 2000, select Settings, and then click Printers.
For Windows Vista, Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003, click Printers and
Faxes.
For Windows XP Home, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Printers and Faxes
icon.
3.
Right-click the driver name.
4.
Click Properties.
The following Properties print-driver tabs are available:
●
General
●
Sharing
●
Ports
●
Advanced
●
Security
176 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
●
Device Settings
●
About
Only device-specific HP driver tabs are described in this STR; the other driver tabs are part of the
operating system.
The following Properties driver tabs are described in this STR:
●
Device Settings
●
About
Device control panel
For information about controlling print jobs from the device control panel, see the HP CM8060/
CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology System Administrator Guide, which is available on the
System Administrator's CD that came with the device, or download it from one of the following Web
sites:
www.hp.com/support/CM8060edgeline
www.hp.com/support/CM8050edgeline
ENWW
Access to print drivers in Windows Vista, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and 177
Windows 2000
Help system
The HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers include a full-featured Help system to provide
assistance with printing and configuration options.
What's this? Help
Windows Vista, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 support What's this?
Help. Gain access to What's this? Help messages in any of the following ways:
●
Right-click a control and then click What's this?. A pop-up Help window appears.
●
Click the ? button in the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an
arrow with a question mark. When you use this special cursor to select a control, the pop-up Help
window for that feature appears.
●
Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears.
Context-sensitive Help
Click the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box to see a context-sensitive Help message.
Incompatible Print Settings messages
Incompatible Print Settings (constraint) messages are unsolicited messages that appear in
response to specific print-driver selections. These messages appear in response to selections that are
illogical or impossible given the device capabilities or the current settings of other controls.
NOTE: Constraint messages are limited, and the underlying software architecture might
accept some settings that are illogical or impossible for the device to perform. Sending a job
that has incompatible settings can lead to unexpected results. If print jobs do not print as
expected, see the device documentation to ensure that the device has the expected capabilities.
In Windows Vista, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating
environments, some technically invalid print-driver configurations result in warning messages when
trying to save the conflicting settings in the driver. Duplexing, for example, is not possible when the
Labels paper type is selected. The following figure shows an example of an Incompatible Print
Settings message.
178 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Figure 5-1  An Incompatible Print Settings message
To accept the change, select Resolve all conflicts for me automatically. and then click OK.
The driver resets the conflicting control to a setting that is compatible with the new value.
To keep the conflicting setting, select I will resolve the conflict myself. and then click OK.
NOTE: If the conflict is not resolved when the driver is closed, the same dialog appears again
when a print job is sent to the device.
ENWW
Help system 179
Advanced tab features
To gain access to the Advanced tab:
1.
Click Start.
2.
For Windows 2000, select Settings, and then click Printers.
For Windows Vista, Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003, click Printers and
Faxes.
For Windows XP Home, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Printers and Faxes
icon.
3.
Right-click the driver name.
4.
Click Printing Preferences.
5.
Click the Advanced tab.
Use the Advanced tab to change the layout of printed pages and to configure special controls that
are not commonly used. Also use this tab to control print-driver features such as paper size and number
of copies (although most current software programs support these features in the print dialog box or
through the page settings in the software program). The following figure shows the Advanced tab.
180 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Figure 5-2  Advanced tab
The Advanced tab contains the following controls:
●
Paper/Output
●
Graphic
●
Document Options
Paper/Output
The Paper/Output control contains the following settings:
●
Copy Count
●
Collated check box (becomes available and can be changed when the Copy Count setting is
greater than 1)
NOTE:
setting.
ENWW
When changing control settings, click the setting to see the drop-down list for that
Advanced tab features 181
Copy Count
Copy Count specifies the number of copies to print. This driver setting is useful for software programs
that do not provide a copy count. If a copy count is available in the software program, set the copy
count in the software program.
The requested number of copies appears in the Copy Count option. Select the number by typing in
the box or by using the up and down arrows to the right of the text box. Valid entries are numbers
from 1 to 9999. The copies value will not advance from the maximum number (9999) to 1 when the
up arrow is used, or change from 1 to the maximum number (9999) when the down arrow is used.
When you click another group box or leave the Advanced tab, invalid entries into the edit box (such
as non-numerical input, numbers less than 1, or numbers greater than the maximum allowed) are
changed to the last valid value that appeared in the box. The default number of copies is 1.
Because the number of copies can be set in some software programs, conflicts between the software
program and the driver can arise. In most cases, the software program and the driver communicate so
that the number of copies set in one location (such as the software program) appears in the other (such
as the driver). For some software programs, this communication does not take place, and the copies
values are treated independently. For example, setting 10 copies in the program and then setting 10
copies in the driver results in 100 copies (10 x 10) being printed. Set the number of copies in the
software program, wherever possible.
Collated
The Collated check box is visible when the Copy Count setting is selected. The check box becomes
available and can be changed when the Copy Count setting is greater than 1.
When collated, pages print consecutively for each copy of the document. When not collated, copies of
each page print together.
This setting is not synchronized with the collate setting in the software program Print dialog box.
Settings in the software program override settings in the print driver. For instance, when using
Microsoft Word, the Collate check box in the Print dialog box is selected by default. However, in
the print driver, the Collated check box on the Advanced tab is not selected by default. The
software program setting takes precedence over the driver setting, and the printed output is collated by
default. Therefore, if the Collated check box is selected in the driver, but the Collate setting is not
enabled in the software program, the printed output is uncollated.
To obtain uncollated printed output, clear the Collate setting in both the driver and the software
program.
Graphic
The Graphic control contains the following settings:
●
Image Color Management
●
True Type Fonts
NOTE: When changing control settings, click on the setting to see the drop-down list for that
settings.
182 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Image Color Management
This setting lists the available Image Color Management (ICM) options that are used for printing color
graphics. ICM, a set of calculations for color matching, makes it possible for programs to adjust colors
before printing so that the color of images on the screen more closely match the color of those images
when they are printed. The following options are available:
●
●
ICM Method. The ICM Method setting specifies how to print the color graphics.
●
To enable Image Color Management, click the option and then select ICM Enabled.
●
If you want the host computer to perform calculations for color matching before it sends the
document to the product, select ICM Handled by Host System.
●
If you want the device to perform calculations for color matching, select ICM Handled by
Printer. In this case, a set of rules for mapping the colors is created and downloaded to the
device. The device uses these rules to adjust colors in the document.
ICM Intent. The ICM Intent setting specifies how color images are created to produce the image
that looks best on the printed page.
●
When printing a chart or using fully saturated, bright colors, select Graphics.
●
For photographs or pictures where the colors blend together, select Pictures to maximize
the contrast. This is the default setting.
●
When the document uses a color that must be matched exactly, and the document is printing
on a device that has that specific color of ink, select Proof.
●
To preview the color settings from another device, select Match.
True Type Font
Use Substitute with Device Font (the default setting) to use equivalent printer fonts to print
documents that contain TrueType fonts. This permits faster printing, but can eliminate special characters
that the equivalent printer font does not support. Select Download as Softfont to download
TrueType fonts for printing instead of using printer fonts.
Document Options
The Document Options control contains the following settings:
●
Advanced Printing Features
●
Print Optimizations (HP PCL 6 and PCL 5 drivers)
●
PostScript Options (PS Emulation driver)
●
Printer Features
●
Layout Options
NOTE:
setting.
ENWW
When changing control settings, click the setting to see the drop-down list for that
Advanced tab features 183
Advanced Printing Features
When the Advanced Printing Features setting is Enabled, metafile spooling is turned on and
Finishing tab options such as Page Order, Booklet Layout, and Pages per Sheet are
available, depending on the device. For normal printing, leave the Advanced Printing Features
setting at the default (Enabled). If compatibility problems occur, disable the feature. However, some
advanced printing features might still be available in the print driver, even if they have been disabled.
Selecting an advanced printing feature in the print driver that has been disabled on the Advanced
tab automatically makes the feature available.
Print Optimizations
NOTE: Print Optimizations settings are available only in the HP PCL 6 and PCL 5
drivers. They are not available in the PS Emulation driver.
The default setting for Print Optimizations is Enabled. When this feature is enabled and the
document contains overlapping text and graphics, the text that is placed on top of a graphic might not
print correctly. If the printed output is not correct, disable this feature. When this feature is disabled,
print optimization-features, such as substituting device fonts for TrueType fonts and scanning for
horizontal and vertical rules, are turned off.
PostScript Options
NOTE: PostScript Output Options settings are available only in the PS Emulation driver.
They are not available in the HP PCL 6 and PCL 5 drivers.
Select one of the following settings in the PostScript Output Options drop-down menu:
●
Optimize for Speed. This is the default setting.
●
Optimize for Portability. Use this setting to create a file that conforms to the Adobe
Document Structuring Conventions (ADSC). Each page of the document is a self-contained object.
For example, this option is for creating a postscript file and printing it on a different device.
●
Encapsulated PostScript (EPS). Use this setting to include the file as an image in another
document that is to be printed from another program.
●
Archive format. Use this option to create a postscript file that can be used later.
Select one of the following settings in the TrueType Font Download drop-down menu:
●
Automatic. This is the default setting.
●
Outline. Select this option to download the TrueType font as a scalable outline font.
●
Bitmap. Select this option to download the TrueType font as a bitmap font.
●
Native TrueType. If the device is a TrueType rasterizer printer; select this option to download
the TrueType font as an outline font.
184 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Select one of the following settings in the PostScript Language Level drop-down menu:
●
3
●
2
●
1
The default setting is 3. It is usually better to select the highest number available, because it provides
more features. In some instances, lower numbers might be necessary. For example, when printing a file
to disk for someone who has a level-1 device, select 1.
Select one of the following settings in the Send PostScript Error Handler drop-down menu:
●
Yes. This is the default setting. When an error occurs in the print job, an error page is sent to the
device.
●
No. Select this setting if you do not want an error page to be printed when an error occurs.
Printer Features
The Printer Features setting contains the following sub-settings:
●
The Edge-To-Edge setting is Off by default. When On is selected, the print area expands to
allow printing within 1mm of the edge of the page
●
Print All Text as Black.
The Print All Text as Black setting is Disabled by default. When Enabled is selected, the
driver prints all text as black regardless of the original document text color. Color text is printed
as black, except for white text, which remains white. (White text is a reliable method of printing
reverse typeface against a dark background.) This setting does not affect graphic images on the
page, nor does it affect any text that is part of a graphic.
●
Send TrueType as Bitmap.
NOTE: The Send TrueType as Bitmap. setting is available only in the HP PCL 6 and
HP PCL 5 unidrivers. It is not available in the PS Emulation Unidriver.
Send TrueType as Bitmap provides an alternative for software programs that have trouble
using TrueType fonts for special graphic aspects such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The setting
is Disabled (off) by default. The TrueType fonts are converted to bitmap soft fonts before
downloading. When Enabled, the driver sends TrueType fonts to the printer as outlines, which
retains the standard format (outline) of the fonts.
●
Raster Compression
NOTE: The Raster Compression setting is available only in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver. It
is not available in the HP PCL 5 Unidriver or the PS Emulation Unidriver.
ENWW
Advanced tab features 185
Use the Raster Compression feature to select the graphics-compression method:
●
●
Automatic. The software determines the best compression method to use.
●
Best Quality. This option forces the software to use a lossless compression method.
(Lossless means that no data is lost during compression.)
●
Maximum Compression. Where applicable, this option requires the software to always
use a lossy compression method (some data is lost).
Alternative Letterhead Mode.
When selected, this option enables you to always load preprinted or letterhead paper types the
same way for all print jobs, whether you are printing on one side of the sheet or on both sides of
the sheet. Load the paper as you would for printing on both sides.
If the device tray has an icon that indicates to load the paper either face-up or face-down, load
the paper opposite of the orientation shown.
NOTE: When this option is selected, the printing speed slows to the speed required to
print on both sides of the sheet.
●
Graphics Mode. (HP PCL 5 driver)
Use the Graphics Mode feature to select one of the following settings:
●
Send Graphics as Vector. Select this setting to send graphics to the device as a
combination of HP Graphics Language, version 2 (HP-GL/2), and raster images. This setting
might produce higher-quality output. It is the default setting.
●
Send Graphics as Raster. Select this setting to send all graphics to the device as images
composed of individual dots. This setting might improve printing speed in some cases.
Layout Options
The Layout Options setting contains the Page Order sub-setting.
Page Order specifies the order in which the pages of the document are printed. Front to Back
prints the document so that page 1 prints first. Back to Front prints the document so that page 1
prints last.
NOTE: The page-ordering operation works on whole sheets of paper rather than on
individual logical pages. Accordingly, if Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is greater
than one, the ordering of logical pages on a physical sheet of paper does not change.
186 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Printing Shortcuts tab features
To gain access to the Printing Shortcuts tab:
1.
Click Start.
2.
For Windows 2000, select Settings, and then click Printers.
For Windows Vista, Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003, click Printers and
Faxes.
For Windows XP Home, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Printers and Faxes
icon.
3.
Right-click the driver name.
4.
Click Printing Preferences.
5.
Click the Printing Shortcuts tab.
Use the Printing Shortcuts tab to print jobs with specific printer-driver settings. The available
settings depend on the device configuration. Select one of the defined shortcuts or create custom
printing shortcuts. The following figure shows the Printing Shortcuts tab.
ENWW
Printing Shortcuts tab features 187
Figure 5-3   Printing Shortcuts tab
Select one of the defined shortcuts or custom printing shortcuts, and then click OK to print the job with
the specific printer-driver settings.
You can store a maximum of 25 custom printing shortcuts on a particular system.
Select any custom printing shortcut and then click Delete to delete it.
Click Reset to set the default options for all features of the selected shortcut.
Topics:
●
Using defined printing shortcuts
●
Create a custom printing shortcut
188 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Using defined printing shortcuts
The following defined printing shortcuts are available:
●
Professional Color Quality (Default). Select this option to print with Professional as the
Color quality: setting.
●
General Office Color Quality. Select this option to print with General office as the Color
quality: setting.
●
Black and White Printing. Select this option to print with Black and White as the Color
options: setting.
●
Factory Defaults. Select this option to print with the default printer-driver settings.
Click Reset to set the default options for all features of the selected shortcut.
Create a custom printing shortcut
Create a custom printing shortcut by following these steps:
1.
Select one of the defined shortcuts as a base.
2.
Select the appropriate print settings on the Printing Shortcuts tab, or by using the settings on
any of the Printing Preferences tabs.
NOTE: Staple options are available only if the optional HP Multifunction Finisher is
installed.
3.
On the Printing Shortcuts tab, click Save As.... The Printing shortcuts box appears, as
shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-4  Printing shortcuts box
4.
ENWW
Type a name for the custom printing shortcut, and then click OK. The custom printing shortcut
appears in the printing shortcuts list.
Printing Shortcuts tab features 189
Paper/Quality tab features
To gain access to the Paper/Quality tab:
1.
Click Start.
2.
For Windows 2000, select Settings, and then click Printers.
For Windows Vista, Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003, click Printers and
Faxes.
For Windows XP Home, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Printers and Faxes
icon.
3.
Right-click the driver name.
4.
Click Printing Preferences.
5.
Click the Paper/Quality tab.
Use the Paper/Quality tab to specify the size, type, and source of the paper. Also use this tab to
specify the location of different paper types within the print job. The following figure shows the Paper/
Quality tab.
190 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Figure 5-5   Paper/Quality tab
The Paper/Quality tab contains the following control sets:
●
Paper Options
●
Document preview image
●
Color Quality
Paper Options
The settings specified in the Paper Options group box on the Paper/Quality tab apply to all of
the pages of the document. The following figure shows the Paper Options group box and the
selections that are available by default.
ENWW
Paper/Quality tab features 191
Figure 5-6   Paper Options group box
The Paper Options group box contains the following controls:
●
Page size:
●
Custom Paper Size
●
Paper Source:
●
Paper Type:
●
Special pages:
Page size:
The Page size: setting is a drop-down menu that lists all of the supported paper sizes.
Move the mouse cursor over the dimensions label to change the cursor from an arrow to a gloved
hand. Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units.
Because paper-size settings in most software programs override driver settings, it is generally best to
use the driver to set paper size only when printing from software programs that do not include a papersize setting, such as NotePad, or when producing a book or a booklet that does not require different
paper sizes.
NOTE: Certain software programs can override the size command and specify different
paper sizes within a single document.
When you change the print-driver setting to a paper size that is not currently loaded in the
device, a control-panel message appears that prompts you to load the paper size or select
another tray.
192 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Custom Paper Size
The Custom Paper Size dialog box appears when you click Custom… on the Paper/Quality
tab. The following figure shows the initial appearance of the Custom Paper Size dialog box.
The Custom Paper Size dialog box for the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline
Technology does not reflect the maximum paper size that the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with
Edgeline Technology supports.
Figure 5-7   Custom Paper Size dialog box
Name
Use the Name text box to type a new name for a custom paper size.
The name that appears in the Name text box depends on the following conditions:
●
If a saved custom paper size has been selected from the drop-down menu on the Paper/
Quality tab, then the Name text box shows the name of the selected custom paper size.
●
If a standard paper size has been selected on the Paper/Quality tab, then the Name text box
shows the default name of "Custom."
●
If a new name has been typed into the Name text box for the purpose of saving a new size or
renaming an existing size, then that new name will remain in the text box until the new size is
saved or the dialog box is closed.
If you type a new name into the Name text box, but then do not click Save, you can change the
width and height values without losing the name. However, if you close the dialog box without clicking
Save, any unsaved name or size values are lost without warning.
ENWW
Paper/Quality tab features 193
Paper size
Change the width and height values by typing numeric strings into the edit boxes in the Paper Size
group box.
Any entry that is greater than the maximum limits of the width and height control is rounded down to
the maximum valid entry, while any entry that is smaller than the minimum limits of the width and
height control is rounded up to the minimum valid entry.
If units are in millimeters, the custom paper-size range minimum is the limit rounded up to the nearest
whole millimeter. The custom paper-size range maximum is the limit rounded down to the nearest
whole millimeter. Any non-numerical entry reverts to the last valid entry. Width and height entries are
validated when the focus has changed.
The resolution of each control is 1 millimeter or 1/10 of an inch, depending on the current
measurement units.
Units
To change measurement units, click one of the options in the Units group box (either Inches or
Millimeters).
Custom width and height control limits
The minimum paper size for the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology is 76.2
x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) and the maximum is 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches). The following
table summarizes paper size limits for each paper-handling device.
Table 5-1  HP PCL 6 driver custom paper sizes
Tray
Dimensions
Minimum
Maximum
Tray 1 (80-sheet manual feed)
Width
76 mm (3.0 inches)
215 mm (8.5 inches)
Height
127 mm (5.0 inches)
356 mm (14.0 inches)
Width
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
215 mm (8.5 inches)
Height
210 mm (8.26 inches)
356 mm (14.0 inches)
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
215 mm (8.5 inches)
Height
210 mm (8.26 inches)
356 mm (14.0 inches)
Width
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
215 mm (8.5 inches)
Height
210.0 mm (8.26 inches)
356 mm (14.0 inches)
Tray 2 - 4 (500-sheet)
Trays 5 (4000-sheet, optional) Width
Duplexing unit
Paper Source:
The Paper Source: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source
trays depends on the device accessories that are installed. Any optional source trays that are installed
through the Device Settings tab also appear here.
194 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
The Paper Source: drop-down menu can contain the following options, depending on what has
been installed on the device:
●
Automatically select
●
Printer Auto Select
●
Manual Feed in Tray 1
●
Tray 1
●
Tray 2
●
Tray 3
●
Tray 4
●
Tray 5
The default setting is Automatically Select. When this setting is selected, the HP CM8060/
CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology uses the source tray that supports the selected paper
size. If you select a source tray other than Automatically select, make sure that the correct paper
size is loaded in the source tray. For information about paper sources, see Paper attributes on page 289.
Paper Type:
The Paper Type: drop-down menu shows all of the paper types that the HP CM8060/CM8050
Color MFP with Edgeline Technology supports. When you use the default setting, Unspecified, the
device uses the default paper type, which is usually Plain.
No mechanism exists for manually adding custom paper types through the driver. Custom types can be
added only by using the bidirectional communication mechanism, so they must already exist in the
device when the bidirectional query occurs. If bidirectional communication is enabled, then an
updated list of paper types is returned. If bidirectional communication is not enabled, then the driver
looks for custom paper types that have been saved from a previous bidirectional communication query,
and uses those. Otherwise, no custom paper types are available through the driver.
Select a paper type instructs the device to use a group of predefined settings to create the best possible
print quality for that type of paper.
CAUTION: Selecting a paper type that does not match the type of paper that is loaded in the
tray can damage the device.
The following standard types appear in the list:
ENWW
●
Unspecified
●
Plain
●
HP Office LG (long grain) Plain
●
HP Premium Presentation Matte 120g
●
HP Brochure & Flyer Matte 180g
●
HP Cover Matte 200g
●
HP Edgeline Glossy 180g
Paper/Quality tab features 195
●
HP Edgeline Glossy 220G
●
Cardstock
●
Matte
●
Matte Brochure
●
Matte Cover
●
Labels
●
Letterhead
●
Preprinted
●
Prepunched
●
Colored
●
Bond
●
Recycled
The default setting is Unspecified, and the program selects the paper type. Before selecting a
different setting, make sure that the correct paper type is loaded in the tray that is specified in the
Paper Source: setting.
If the print-driver setting is changed to a paper type that is not currently loaded in the device, a controlpanel message appears that prompts you to load the selected paper type or select another tray.
Special pages:
Use the Special pages: (“page exceptions”) list box to select different trays loaded with different
types of paper for different parts of the print job. For example, you can have covers printed on
different paper, or you can insert pre-printed pages at designated places to print books.
Select an option in the Special pages: list box, and then click Settings.... Use the Settings dialog
box to control the settings for the special pages of the print job. Examples of the dialog boxes for the
special pages options are shown in the following figures.
196 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Figure 5-8  Covers dialog box
Figure 5-9  Print pages on different paper dialog box
ENWW
Paper/Quality tab features 197
Figure 5-10  Insert blank or preprinted sheets dialog box
Figure 5-11  Chapter separator pages dialog box
NOTE: Options available in the Settings dialog box change depending on the selection
made in the Special pages: list box.
198 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up.
Move the cursor over the document preview image to change the cursor from an arrow to a gloved
hand. Toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image.
Figure 5-12  Document preview image
Color Quality
The Color Quality group box is shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-13  Color Quality group box
The Color Quality group box contains the following controls:
ENWW
●
Color Quality drop-down menu
●
HP real life technologies
Paper/Quality tab features 199
Color Quality drop-down menu
The Color Quality drop-down menu contains the following settings:
●
Professional (default). Use this setting to print jobs with color saturation levels that are
comparable to competitive devices that are using their default mode.
●
General office. Use this setting to print jobs with lower color saturation levels.
NOTE: Both color-quality settings print jobs with the same black saturation level. Black text,
lines, and graphics are identical between the two modes.
HP real life technologies
Access HP real life technologies options from the Paper/Quality tab, which is shown in the
following figure.
Figure 5-14  HP real life technologies options
200 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
The following options can be selected from the HP real life technologies drop down menu:
●
RLT photo fix “off”
●
'Basic' RLT photo fix
●
'Full' RLT photo fix
Use any of the following controls to enhance digital images.
RLT photo fix “off.” Select the RLT photo fix “off” option if no image enhancements will need
to be applied.
'Basic' RLT photo fix. Select the 'Basic' RLT photo fix option if you want to apply the following
ehancements:
●
Smart Focusing. Use the Smart Focusing setting to increase the apparent resolution of lower
resolution images. Many images that are downloaded from the Internet or from digital cameras
can be compressed because of size restrictions, and might exhibit pixilation artifacts when
printed. Smart Focusing upscales the image to the printer resolution without accentuating these
artifacts.
●
Sharpness. Many images are improved by increasing their sharpness. Use the Sharpness
setting to make edge detail more prominent. The filter detects regions that contain significant
variations in pixel value along a number of different vectors (which denotes edges) and then
applies a filter to enhance detail.
'Full' RLT photo fix. Select the 'Full' RLT photo fix option if you want to apply the following
ehancements:
ENWW
●
Automatic Photo Brightening. Use the Automatic Photo Brightening setting to increase
image contrast for a more visually pleasing result. This filter is useful with flat images (images in
which much of the image content is compressed into a small, dynamic range of pixel values). Flat
images can result from low lighting, environmental haze, or camera or scanner limitations.
●
Automatic Adaptive Lighting. Use the Automatic Adaptive Lighting setting to adjust
lighting levels to reveal areas in shadow. The filter locates dark areas in an image and brings out
detail without degrading other features in the image.
●
Smart Focusing. Use the Smart Focusing setting to increase the apparent resolution of lower
resolution images. Many images that are downloaded from the Internet or from digital cameras
can be compressed because of size restrictions, and might exhibit pixilation artifacts when
printed. Smart Focusing upscales the image to the printer resolution without accentuating these
artifacts.
●
Sharpness. Many images are improved by increasing their sharpness. Use the Sharpness
setting to make edge detail more prominent. The filter detects regions that contain significant
variations in pixel value along a number of different vectors (which denotes edges) and then
applies a filter to enhance detail.
●
Red Eye Removal. Use the Red Eye Removal setting to automatically remove red-eyes from
the image. This unique and highly effective feature automatically recognizes and removes red
eyes on the image that were produced by a flash.
Paper/Quality tab features 201
Effects tab features
To gain access to the Effects tab:
1.
Click Start.
2.
For Windows 2000, select Settings, and then click Printers.
For Windows Vista, Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003, click Printers and
Faxes.
For Windows XP Home, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Printers and Faxes
icon.
3.
Right-click the driver name.
4.
Click Printing Preferences.
5.
Click the Effects tab.
Use the Effects tab to create unique paper effects such as scaling and watermarks. The following
figure shows the Effects tab.
Figure 5-15   Effects tab
202 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
The Effects tab contains the following controls:
●
Resizing Options
●
Document preview image
●
Watermarks
Resizing Options
The Resizing Options group box contains the following controls:
●
Actual Size (default)
●
Print Document On setting
●
Scale to Fit option
●
% of Normal Size setting
Actual Size
Actual Size is the default setting. It prints the document without changing the document size.
Print Document On
Click the Print Document On option to format the document for one paper size and then print the
document on a different paper size, with or without scaling the image to fit the new paper size.
The Print Document On control is disabled by either of the following conditions:
●
The % of Normal Size value is not 100.
●
The Pages per Sheet value on the Finishing tab is not 1.
When Print Document On is selected, the drop-down menu shows the paper sizes on which you
can print. The list contains all of the standard paper sizes that the selected paper source supports and
any custom sizes that have been created. When Print Document On is selected, Scale to Fit is
automatically selected. Clear this check box if you do not want the document reduced or enlarged to fit
on the selected paper.
Scale to Fit
The Scale to Fit option box specifies whether each formatted document page image is scaled to fit
the target paper size. By default, Scale to Fit is selected when Print Document On is selected. If
the setting is turned off, then the document page images will not be scaled, and are instead centered
at full size on the paper. If the document size is larger than the paper size, then the document image is
clipped. If it is smaller, then it is centered within the paper. The following figure shows preview images
for a document formatted for Legal-size paper with the Print Document On check box selected and
the paper size specified as Letter.
ENWW
Effects tab features 203
Figure 5-16   Preview images – Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right)
When the size for which the document is formatted (that is, the logical size) differs from the target size,
the preview image uses a dashed gray line to show the boundaries of the logical page in relation to
the target page size.
% of Normal Size
The % of Normal Size option provides a slider bar to use for scaling the percentage setting. The
default setting in the entry box is 100% of normal size. Normal size is defined as the paper size that is
selected within the driver or what the driver receives from the software program (if the software
program does not negotiate the paper size with the driver). The driver scales the page by the
appropriate factor and sends it to the device.
The limits of the range are from 25% to 400%, and any values outside the range are adjusted to those
limits as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the Tab key is pressed or another
control is selected).
Any change to the scale also changes the page preview, which increases or decreases from the upperleft corner of the preview.
The slider bar controls the scale directly. The value in the edit box changes as the slider-bar indicator is
dragged, and the document preview image is updated to the new image scale. Each click on the
arrows increases or decreases the scale by 1%. Each click on the slider bar affects the scale by 10%.
Dragging the slider-bar indicator does not yield an exact value. Instead, either use the slider-bar
indicator to approximate the value and then use the arrows to refine the value, or type the value into
the entry box.
The following settings disable % of Normal Size:
●
Print Document On on the Effects tab is selected
●
Pages per Sheet on the Finishing tab is not 1
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up.
Move the cursor over the document preview image to change the cursor from an arrow to a gloved
hand. Toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image.
204 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Figure 5-17  Document preview image
Watermarks
Use the Watermarks feature to select a watermark, create a custom watermark (text only), or edit an
existing watermark. The following watermarks are preset in the driver:
●
(none)
●
Confidential
●
Draft
●
SAMPLE
The drop-down menu shows alphabetically sorted watermarks that are currently available on the
system plus the string "(none)", which indicates that no watermark is selected. This is the default
setting. Any watermark that is selected from this list appears in the preview image.
When the First Page Only check box is selected, the watermark is printed only on the first page of
the document. The First Page Only check box is disabled when the current watermark selection is
"(none)".
Watermarks are applied to logical pages. For example, when Pages per Sheet is set to "4" and
First Page Only is turned off, four watermarks appear on the physical page (one on each logical
page).
Click Edit, and the Watermark Details dialog box appears.
ENWW
Effects tab features 205
Figure 5-18   Watermark Details dialog box
The dialog box shows a preview image and provides options for creating a new watermark and
controlling the message angle and font attributes.
Click OK to accept all of the changes that are made in the Watermark Details dialog box.
However, clicking Cancel does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark
and then select a different watermark or click New, all of the changes are saved, and only the
current, unsaved changes can be canceled.
Current watermarks
The Current Watermarks group box contains a list of available watermarks, both the predefined
watermarks that are available in the driver and any new watermarks that have been created.
To create a new watermark, click New. The new watermark appears in the Current Watermarks
list and in the Watermark Message edit box as "Untitled" until you name it. The name typed in
the Watermark Message field appears in the Current Watermarks group box in the
Watermark Details dialog box and in the Watermarks group box on the Effects tab.
To name the new watermark, type the selected watermark text in the Watermark Message edit box.
To delete a watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list and click Delete. A
warning appears asking whether you are sure you want to delete the selected item. Click Cancel to
keep the watermark. Click OK to delete the selected watermark.
206 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
NOTE: No more that 30 watermarks can exist in the Current Watermarks list at one time.
When the limit of 30 watermarks is reached, the New button is disabled.
To edit an existing watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list. If you change
the Watermark Message for that watermark, in effect creates a new watermark.
Watermark Message
The Watermark Message is also the name that identifies the watermark in the Current
Watermarks list, except when more than one watermark has the same message. For example, you
might want several different watermarks can contain the message DRAFT, each with a different
typeface or font size. When this occurs, the string is appended with a space, a pound sign, and a
number (for example, Draft #2). When a number is added, the number two is used first, but if the
resulting name is also in the list, then the number increases until the name is unique (Draft #3, Draft
#4, and so on).
Message Angle
Use the controls in the Message Angle group box to print the watermark in different orientations on
the page. All settings center the watermark string within the page; the selection of a particular setting
affects only the angle of the string placement. The following settings are available:
●
Diagonal. This is the default setting. Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans
the lower-left to upper-right corners of the page.
●
Horizontal. Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans the mid-left and mid-right
edges of the page.
●
Custom. Select this setting to place the text at the specified angle across the page. Use the
numeric spin box to select the angle.
Font Attributes
Use the controls in the Font Attributes group box to change the font and the shading, size, and style
of the font.
The Font Attributes group box contains the following controls:
ENWW
●
Name. The Name drop-down menu lists fonts that are currently installed on the system. The
default is language-dependent.
●
Color. The Color drop-down menu contains only one option: Gray.
●
Shading. The default Shading setting for new and preset watermarks is Very Light. The
following range of shades is available from the Shading drop-down menu:
●
Lightest
●
Very Light (default)
●
Light
●
Medium Light
●
Medium
●
Medium Dark
Effects tab features 207
●
Dark
●
Very Dark
●
Darkest
These values represent the intensity of the gray that is used. Select Light to produce a lightly
saturated gray watermark. Select Lightest to produce the lightest shade of watermark. Select
Darkest to produce a black watermark.
●
Size. Font sizes from 1 to 999 points are available from the Size menu. The default point size is
language-dependent.
●
Style. The following settings are available:
●
Regular
●
Bold
●
Italic
●
Bold Italic
The default Style setting for new and preset watermarks is Regular.
Default watermark settings
The following table shows Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks.
Table 5-2  Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks
Setting
New watermark
Preset watermark
Name
Arial
Varies by language
Color
Gray
Gray
Shading
Very Light
Very Light
Size
80
Varies by language
Style
Regular
Regular
Click OK to accept all of the changes that have been made in the Watermark Details dialog box.
Clicking Cancel does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark and then
select a different watermark or click New, all of the changes are saved, and only the current, unsaved
changes can be canceled.
208 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Finishing tab features
CAUTION: Disabling Mopier Mode disrupts functionality for the Output and Finishing
tab features.
To gain access to the Finishing tab:
1.
Click Start.
2.
For Windows 2000, select Settings, and then click Printers.
For Windows Vista, Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003, click Printers and
Faxes.
For Windows XP Home, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Printers and Faxes
icon.
3.
Right-click the driver name.
4.
Click Printing Preferences.
5.
Click the Finishing tab.
Use the Finishing tab to print booklets and control the paper output. The following figure shows the
Finishing tab.
ENWW
Finishing tab features 209
Figure 5-19  Finishing tab
The Finishing tab contains the following controls:
●
Document options
●
Document preview image
●
Orientation
Document options
The Document Options group box contains the following controls:
●
Print on Both Sides
●
Flip Pages Up
●
Booklet layout
●
Pages per Sheet
●
Print Page Borders
210 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
●
Page Order
Print on Both Sides
The default setting for the Print on Both Sides option is off (not selected). Print on Both Sides is
available when the following conditions exist:
●
●
Paper Type: on the Paper/Quality tab is set to any paper type except for the following types:
●
Labels
●
Tough Paper
Page size: is set to any paper size except for the following size:
●
Statement
Automatically print on both sides
The duplexing unit in the device prints on two sides of a sheet of paper when the Print on Both
Sides option is specified in the print job.
Devices with a duplexer installed support smart duplexing. The smart duplexing feature increases
printing performance by preventing one-page print jobs or single-sided pages of a duplexed print job
from going through the duplexing unit even when the duplexing feature has been selected in the driver.
All paper types support the smart duplexing feature, except for paper types that cannot be printed on
both sides, such as labels, and the following paper types:
●
Prepunched
●
Preprinted
●
Letterhead
When the paper type is set to Unspecified, the smart duplexing feature is disabled.
To achieve the best print quality when printing on the second side of the page, the device makes
adjustments to its print modes. Selecting a paper type instructs the device to use a group of settings
(such as fuser temperature and print speed) to create an image that has the best possible quality for
that paper. This group of settings is known as a print mode. A different print mode is used with each
paper type. Print-mode adjustments for the second side of a duplexed page are automatic.
Flip Pages Up
Use the Flip Pages Up check box to specify the duplex-binding option. By default, the Flip Pages
Up check box is available only when Print on Both Sides is selected.
The following table demonstrates the results of selecting this check box, depending on the paper
orientation selected on the Finishing tab.
ENWW
Finishing tab features 211
Table 5-3  Page orientation
Orientation (Finishing tab)
Flip Pages Up selected
Flip Pages Up not selected
Portrait
Short-edge binding
Long-edge binding
Landscape
Long-edge binding
Short-edge binding
When Print on Both Sides is selected, the document preview image changes to show a spiral
binding along either the left edge or the top edge of the page. In addition, a folded-over corner
appears in the lower-right portion of the preview image, indicating that printing occurs on the back
side. An arrow on the folded-over corner points in the direction that the pages would be flipped if they
were bound together.
Short-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by flipping over like the pages of a calendar.
Long-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by turning like the pages of a book.
Booklet layout
The Booklet Layout drop-down menu, visible when Print on Both Sides is selected, offers choices
that are based on the current paper size. The default setting for the Booklet Printing drop-down
menu is Off. The other settings have the following format, where [paper size] depends on the paper
size that is set on the Paper/Quality tab:
●
Left Edge Binding
●
Right Edge Binding
Selecting Left Edge Binding or Right Edge Binding changes the document preview image to
show the location of the binding. If the Pages per Sheet setting is on the default setting of 1, it
automatically changes to 2 pages per sheet. Changing the Pages per Sheet setting manually to
4, 6, 9, or 16 pages per sheet disables the booklet setting.
Topics:
●
Book and Booklet Printing
●
Print a booklet
Book and Booklet Printing
The HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology supports book and booklet printing.
A book is a print job that consists of at least two pages. It can have a different paper type for the front
cover, first page, other pages, last page, or back cover. Use the special pages settings on the Paper/
Quality tab to select the following printing options for the book:
●
Front Cover
●
First Page
●
Other Pages
●
Last Page
●
Back Cover
212 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
A booklet is a print job that places two pages on each side of a sheet that can then be folded into a
booklet that is half the size of the paper. Use the Booklet Layout drop-down menu on the Finishing
tab to control booklet settings.
Print a booklet
Complete the following steps to print a booklet in most software programs:
1.
Click File.
2.
Click Print.
3.
Click Properties.
4.
Click the Finishing tab.
5.
Select the Print on Both Sides check box.
6.
In the Booklet Layout drop-down menu, select the type of booklet printing that you want (for
example, Right Edge Binding).
7.
Click OK in the print driver.
8.
Click OK in the print dialog box to print.
Pages per Sheet
Use the Pages per Sheet option to select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper.
When printing with more than one page per sheet, the pages appear smaller and are arranged on the
sheet in a defined order. The Pages per Sheet drop-down menu provides six settings:
●
1 page per sheet (default)
●
2 pages per sheet
●
4 pages per sheet
●
6 pages per sheet
●
9 pages per sheet
●
16 pages per sheet
NOTE: Selecting an option other than 1 page per sheet makes booklet printing unavailable.
Print Page Borders
Related controls indented beneath the Pages per Sheet edit box are Print Page Borders and
Page Order, which become active when Pages per Sheet is greater than 1.
Print Page Borders sets a line around each page image on a printed sheet to help visually define
the borders of each logical page.
ENWW
Finishing tab features 213
Page Order
The Page Order drop-down menu contains four selections:
●
Right, then Down
●
Down, then Right
●
Left, then Down
●
Down, then Left
The preview document image changes to reflect alterations in these settings, as shown by the examples
in the following figure.
Figure 5-20   Page-order preview images
●
2 pages per sheet
●
4 pages per sheet
●
6 pages per sheet
●
9 pages per sheet
●
16 pages per sheet
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up.
Move the cursor over the document preview image to change the cursor from an arrow to a gloved
hand. Toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image.
Figure 5-21  Document preview image
Orientation
Orientation refers to the layout of the image on the page, and does not affect the way that paper feeds
into the device.
214 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
NOTE: Nearly all software programs establish the orientation for the printed page, so the
page orientation in the driver is useful only for the few software programs that do not set an
orientation.
The Orientation group box contains two options:
●
Portrait. The top edge of the document is the shorter edge of the paper. This is the default
orientation.
●
Landscape. The top edge of the document is the longer edge of the paper.
In addition to the Portrait and Landscape orientation options, you can select the Rotate by 180
degrees check box. This creates a landscape or portrait orientation in which the image is rotated
180°. This setting is useful for printing prepunched paper.
Toggle orientation between portrait and landscape by clicking the document preview image. Selecting
the Rotate by 180 degrees check box does not change the document preview image.
ENWW
Finishing tab features 215
Output tab features
CAUTION: Disabling Mopier Mode disrupts functionality for the Output and Finishing
tab features.
To gain access to the Output tab:
1.
Click Start.
2.
For Windows 2000, select Settings, and then click Printers.
For Windows Vista, Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003, click Printers and
Faxes.
For Windows XP Home, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Printers and Faxes
icon.
3.
Right-click the driver name.
4.
Click Printing Preferences.
5.
Click the Output tab.
Use the Output tab to select where and how the paper exits the device. The following figure shows
the Output tab.
216 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Figure 5-22  Output tab
The Output tab appears among the driver tabs only if an accessory output bin or optional finisher is
installed on the device.
After the accessory output bin or optional finisher is installed, the driver must be configured to reflect
the changes in the device. If bidirectional communication is enabled in your environment, use the
Update Now feature to update the drivers.
To configure the drivers manually after installing the accessory output bin or optional finisher:
1.
Click Start.
2.
For Windows 2000, select Settings, and then click Printers.
For Windows Vista, Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003, click Printers and
Faxes.
For Windows XP Home, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Printers and Faxes
icon.
3.
ENWW
Right-click the driver name.
Output tab features 217
4.
Click Properties.
5.
Click the Device Settings tab.
6.
Click the plus sign next to Installable Options to open the folder.
7.
Click Accessory Output Bin and select the installed output bin or optional finisher in the dropdown menu.
8.
Click OK to make the Output tab available in the Printing Properties.
The Output tab contains the following controls:
●
Output Options
●
Document preview image
●
Output Bin Options
Output Options
To use the Output Options control, an accessory output bin or optional finisher must be installed on
the device.
NOTE:
Staple options are available only if the optional HP Multifunction Finisher is installed.
Use the Output Options drop-down menu to determine whether the print job should be stapled. The
available output options depends on the accessory output bin or optional finisher installed on the
device. The output bin can contain the following options:
●
None
●
One Staple Left
●
One Staple Left Angled
●
Two Staples Left
●
Three Staples Left
Use the Image Shift Settings... button to shift the image on the page. This is useful when binding
the document or using 3–hole punch. Click Image Shift Settings... to open the Image Shift
dialog box, as shown in the following figure.
218 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Figure 5-23  Image Shift dialog box
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up.
Move the cursor over the document preview image to change the cursor from an arrow to a gloved
hand. Toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image.
Figure 5-24  Document preview image
Output Bin Options
To use the Output Bin Options control, an accessory output bin or optional finisher must be
installed on the device.
ENWW
Output tab features 219
Use the Output Bin Options to determine where the print job should exit the device. The available
output bin options depends on the accessory output bin or optional finisher installed on the device. The
output bin can contain the following options:
●
Automatically Select
●
Output Bin 1
●
Output Bin 2
●
Output Bin 3
●
Output Bin 4
●
Output Bin 5
220 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Job Storage tab features
To gain access to the Job Storage tab:
1.
Click Start.
2.
For Windows 2000, select Settings, and then click Printers.
For Windows Vista, Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003, click Printers and
Faxes.
For Windows XP Home, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Printers and Faxes
icon.
3.
Right-click the driver name.
4.
Click Printing Preferences.
5.
Click the Job Storage tab.
Use the job-storage feature to store print jobs in the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline
Technology memory for printing at a later time. These job-storage features are described in the
following sections.
The Job Storage tab appears among the driver tabs only if job-storage feature is enabled, and a
hard disk is installed and configured.
To disable the job-storage feature:
1.
Click Start.
2.
For Windows 2000, select Settings, and then click Printers.
For Windows Vista, Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003, click Printers and
Faxes.
For Windows XP Home, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Printers and Faxes
icon.
3.
Right-click the driver name.
4.
Click Properties.
5.
Click the Device Settings tab.
6.
Select Job Storage.
7.
Select Disabled in the Change 'Job Storage' Setting dialog box that appears.
NOTE: When the job-storage feature is disabled, the Job Storage driver tab is not
visible.
If the job-storage feature is enabled, the Job Storage Mode settings are available on the Job
Storage tab:
ENWW
●
Off
●
Proof and Hold
Job Storage tab features 221
●
Personal Job
●
Quick Copy
●
Stored Job
The following figure shows the Job Storage tab.
Figure 5-25  Job Storage tab
The Job Storage tab contains the following controls:
●
Status group box
●
Job Storage Mode
●
Make Job Personal
●
Job Notification Options
●
User Name
●
Job Name
222 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
●
Using job-storage features when printing
Status group box
The unlabeled group box on the Job Storage tab contains a status message about the destination of
a print job. The status information changes depending on the selections that are made on the Job
Storage tab.
Job Storage Mode
Use the Job Storage Mode options on the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline
Technology to store documents at the device and then control their printing at the device control panel.
The HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology offers the following Job Storage
Mode options:
●
Off
●
Proof and Hold
●
Personal Job
●
Quick Copy
●
Stored Job
Off
When selected, this option turns the job-storage feature off (it is disabled), which means that the print
job will not be stored in the device.
Proof and Hold
To use the Proof and Hold option, the job-storage feature must be enabled.
When selected, this option stores the print job in memory and prints only the first copy of the job,
allowing you to check the first copy. If the document prints correctly, print the remaining copies of the
print job at the control panel. Set the number of proof-and-hold print jobs that can be stored in the
device at the control panel.
After it is released for printing, the proof-and-hold job is immediately deleted from the device. If more
copies are needed, reprint the job from the software program. Sending a second proof-and-hold job
that has the same user name and job name as an existing proof-and-hold job (when the original job
has not been released for printing), overwrites the existing job. Proof-and-hold jobs are deleted when
the device is turned off.
The device configuration holds a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proof-and-hold jobs. The number is set
at the device control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu, and the default is 32. When this preset
limit is reached, the new document overwrites the oldest held document. Also, sending a document that
has the same user name and job name as one that is already stored on the device memory overwrites
the existing document.
Personal Job
To use the Personal Job option, the job-storage feature must be enabled.
ENWW
Job Storage tab features 223
When Personal Job is selected, the print job is sent to the device but is not printed until a selection is
made on the device control panel. Selecting Personal Job activates the PIN group box. The print
job can be printed only after the correct PIN is typed at the control panel. After the job is printed, the
job is immediately deleted from the device. This feature is useful when printing sensitive or confidential
documents should not remain in an output bin after printing.
The Personal Job/PIN coupling has a PIN restriction of four ASCII numeric characters (0 though 9).
Any non-numeric characters are removed immediately. When more than four characters are typed, the
characters past the fourth are truncated. The field temporarily accepts fewer than four digits in the
string, but when the edit field loses focus, zeroes pad the left end until the PIN contains exactly four
digits. The default initialized value for the PIN is 0000 for Personal Job.
After it is released for printing, the personal job is immediately deleted from the device. If more copies
are needed, reprint the job from the software program. Sending a second personal job that has the
same user name and job name as an existing personal job (when the original job has not been
released for printing) overwrites the existing job, regardless of the PIN. Persoanl jobs are deleted when
the device is turned off.
Quick Copy
To use the Quick Copy option, the job-storage feature must be enabled.
After the job prints, use the device control panel to print more copies of the job.
Stored Job
To use the Stored Job option, the job-storage feature must be enabled.
When Stored Job is selected, the job will be stored in the device as if it is an electronic file cabinet.
Nothing will be printed until the job is requested from the device control panel. Use this storage for
forms and other common or shared documents. Selecting Stored Job activates the PIN group box.
The print job can be printed only after the correct PIN is typed at the control panel.
Make Job Personal
Require PIN is available when Stored Job is selected. Select the PIN to Print box, then type a
four-digit PIN number in the box provided. The stored job is sent to the device, where the user must
type the four-digit PIN on the control panel to retrieve the stored job.
The PIN to Print box is selected, but not available, when Personal Job is selected. Type a fourdigit PIN number in the box provided. The stored job is sent to the device, where the user must type the
four-digit PIN on the control panel to retrieve the stored job.
Job Notification Options
Clicking a Job Storage Mode selection causes the User Name and Job Name options to
become available. The Display Job ID when printing check box is selected by default. The
Display Job ID when printing option opens a pop-up dialog box when the job-storage print job is
printed. The dialog box shows the user name and job name that are associated with the stored print
job, as well as the device name, port, and location.
224 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
User Name
Use the User Name settings to help identify the job at the device control panel. The following are the
User Name settings:
●
Windows User Name. This option associates the MS Windows user name with the stored
print job. The MS Windows user name automatically appears in the text field below the
Windows User Name options.
●
Custom. Use this option to type a custom name for the stored print job. Clicking Custom makes
the text field below the option available. The User Name field can contain no more than 16
characters, and is limited to A through Z and 0 through 9 because the name appears on the
device control-panel display. Any typed lowercase character automatically shifts to uppercase.
Any typed character in an ASCII code of fewer than 32 or more than 126 characters is removed
from the edit field, along with all of the characters that follow it. Any character beyond 16 is
truncated.
Job Name
Use the Job Name options to specify a name to identify the job at the device control panel. The
following are the Job Name settings:
●
<Automatic>. This option, which is the default selection, automatically generates the job name
that is associated with the stored print job. The file name of the print job is used if it is available
to the print driver. Otherwise, the software program name or a time stamp is used for the job
name. The file name of the print job is used if it is available to the print driver. Otherwise, the
software program name or a time stamp is used for the job name.
●
Custom. Use this to type a custom job name for the stored print job. When you click the
Custom, the text field below the option becomes available. In those languages for which
<Automatic> cannot be translated without the use of invalid characters, the driver uses a string
of three dashes. The acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating
system. The string must be of a length and type that can appear on the device control-panel
display.
The Job Name field can contain no more than 16 characters, and is limited to A through Z
(uppercase or lowercase) and 0 through 9 so that the name can appear on the device control-panel
display. Any typed lowercase character automatically shifts to uppercase. Any typed character in an
ASCII code of fewer than 32 or more than 126 characters is removed from the edit field, along with
all of the characters that follow it. Any character beyond 16 is truncated.
When the dialog box is closed, or as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the
TAB key is pressed or another control is selected), an empty string is replaced with <Automatic>.
The acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating system. The string
must be of a length and type that can appear on the device control-panel display.
If Job Name Exists. When storing a print job, create a print-job name or allow the device software
to assign one automatically. If a print job that has the same name already exists, the new print job
overwrites the existing print job. To eliminate the chances of a new print job overwriting an old print
job because both have the same name, select Use Job Name + (1-999). When the print-job name
exists, the device software assigns a number between 1 and 999 to the end of the print job name to
make it unique. Select Replace Existing File to always have the device software overwrite an
existing print job that has the same print job name.
ENWW
Job Storage tab features 225
Using job-storage features when printing
Clicking the print icon in the software program toolbar prints the job without using job-storage features.
To use job-storage features when printing:
1.
Click File and then click Print from the software program. The Print dialog box appears.
2.
Click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears.
3.
Click the Job Storage tab.
4.
Select the job-storage options by clicking the appropriate option button, and then complete any
required fields.
5.
Click OK.
Topics:
●
Retrieve a job-storage print job
●
Delete a job-storage print job
Retrieve a job-storage print job
After sending a print job that uses the job-storage feature, retrieve and print the job from the device
control panel.
1.
From the Home screen, touch Job Storage.
2.
In the Retrieve tab, touch the appropriate folder on the left of the screen. A list of stored jobs
appears.
3.
Touch the appropriate job.
If a PIN is set for the stored job, type the correct PIN. After the PIN is confirmed, the job is
unlocked.
4.
To print the job, touch the Retrieve Stored Job button.
Delete a job-storage print job
Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the device memory. Do this from the device control
panel.
1.
From the Home screen, touch Job Storage.
2.
In the Retrieve tab, touch the appropriate folder on the left of the screen. A list of stored jobs
appears.
3.
Touch the appropriate job.
If a PIN is set for the stored job, type the correct PIN. After the PIN is confirmed, the job is
unlocked.
4.
Touch Delete.
5.
A message appears: Do you want to delete this stored job?
226 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Touch Yes. The document is deleted.
Or, do the following:
1.
From the Home screen, touch Job Storage.
2.
In the Retrieve tab, touch the appropriate folder on the left of the screen. A list of stored jobs
appears.
3.
Touch the appropriate job.
4.
Touch Delete.
If a PIN for the stored job, type the correct PIN. After the PIN is confirmed, the job is deleted.
ENWW
Job Storage tab features 227
Color tab features
To gain access to the Color tab:
1.
Click Start.
2.
For Windows 2000, select Settings, and then click Printers.
For Windows Vista, Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003, click Printers and
Faxes.
For Windows XP Home, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Printers and Faxes
icon.
3.
Right-click the driver name.
4.
Click Printing Preferences.
5.
Click the Color tab.
Use the Color tab to print the job in color or black and white. If you select color, you can also select a
color theme.
228 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Figure 5-26   Color tab
The Color tab contains the following control sets:
●
Color Options
●
Color Themes
●
Document preview image
Color Options
Use the Color Options group box to adjust the independent color controls. The settings affect the
print job color rendering and print quality. The Color Options group box contains the following
controls:
ENWW
●
Color printing option
●
Neutral grays
●
More Color Options
Color tab features 229
Color printing option
Select whether to print in Black & white or Color.
Neutral grays
Use the Neutral grays setting to specify how grayscale tones will be printed. The Neutral grays
drop-down menu contains the following settings:
●
4-Color. Select 4-Color to use all four CMYK ink colors (black, cyan, magenta, and yellow) to
reproduce the grayscale tones.
●
Black Only. Select Black Only to use only black ink to create the grayscale tones.
More Color Options
Click More Color Options... to open the Advanced Color Settings screen, as shown in the
following figure.
NOTE: The Advanced Color Settings screen is available only when color quality is set to
Professional on the Paper/Quality tab.
Figure 5-27   Advanced Color Settings screen
Use the Advanced Color Settings screen to increase or decrease the amount of each of the four
basic printing ink colors (black, cyan, magenta, and yellow), which are sometimes labeled as CMYK
options.
230 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Color Themes
The Color Themes group box contains the following settings:
●
Default (sRGB)
●
Image Optimization (sRGB)
●
Adobe RGB (1998)
●
Vivid (sRGB)
●
Custom Profile
Default (sRGB)
Select Default (sRGB) for most printing needs. This setting instructs the device to interpret RGB color
as sRGB, which is the accepted standard of Microsoft and the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C).
Colors are matched to optimize the RGB colors on the screen and to provide vivid images and graphics.
Image Optimization (sRGB)
Select Image optimization (sRGB) to enhance documents in which the content is mainly bitmap
images, such as .GIF or .JPG files. This setting instructs the device to use the best color matching for
rendering sRGB bitmap images. This setting affects only raster data; it has no effect on text or
vectorbased graphics. Using glossy paper in combination with this setting provides the maximum
enhancement.
Adobe RGB (1998)
Select AdobeRGB (1998) for documents that use the Adobe RGB color space rather than sRGB. For
example, some digital cameras capture images in Adobe RGB, and documents that are produced with
Adobe Photoshop® use the Adobe RGB color space. When printing from a professional software
program that uses Adobe RGB, turn off the color management in the software program and allow the
device software to manage the color space.
Vivid (sRGB)
Select Vivid (sRGB) to reproduce graphics (for example, pie charts and bar graphs) with more
saturated colors. This option can be useful when printing business documents that do not contain
images.
Custom Profile
Select Custom Profile when you want to duplicate the printed output from other devices or for using
special effects, such as sepia tones. This setting instructs the device to use a custom input profile to
more accurately predict and control color output.
The default Custom Profile is an emulation of the color table used on the device. The device holds
only one custom profile at a time, so when you download and install another color table, it erases the
default color table and installs the new one.
Download custom profiles from the following Web site:
www.hp.com
ENWW
Color tab features 231
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up.
Move the cursor over the document preview image to change the cursor from an arrow to a gloved
hand. Toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image.
Figure 5-28  Document preview image
232 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Services tab features
To gain access to the Services tab:
1.
Click Start.
2.
For Windows 2000, select Settings, and then click Printers.
For Windows Vista, Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003, click Printers and
Faxes.
For Windows XP Home, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Printers and Faxes
icon.
3.
Right-click the driver name.
4.
Click Printing Preferences.
5.
Click the Services tab.
The Services tab is shown in the following figure.
ENWW
Services tab features 233
Figure 5-29  Services tab
The Services tab contains the following link:
●
Device services
Device services
Click the Device and Supplies Status icon to open the Device Status screen of the HP EWS.
234 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Device Settings tab features
The Device Settings tab is in the Properties window for the print driver. To gain access to the
Device Settings tab:
1.
Click Start.
2.
For Windows 2000, select Settings, and then click Printers.
For Windows Vista, Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003, click Printers and
Faxes.
For Windows XP Home, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Printers and Faxes
icon.
3.
Right-click the driver name.
4.
Click Properties.
5.
Click the Device Settings tab.
The Device Settings tab contains controls for paper-handling devices and controls for managing the
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology.
Available options depend on the driver and the particular feature. The following figure shows the
Device Settings tab for the HP PCL 6 driver.
ENWW
Device Settings tab features 235
Figure 5-30  HP PCL 6 driver Device Settings tab
The following figure shows the Device Settings tab for the PS Emulation driver.
236 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Figure 5-31  PS Emulation driver Device Settings tab
The Device Settings tab contains the following controls:
●
Form to Tray Assignment
●
Font Substitution Table
●
External Fonts
●
PS Emulation driver Device Settings
●
Installable Options
Form to Tray Assignment
A system administrator can use Form to Tray Assignment to specify the paper size in each input
tray.
The HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology supports more than one source of
paper. Assign a form (which defines the paper size and margins) to each paper source. When a form
is matched to a source, select the form to print. The device prints from the tray to which that form is
assigned.
ENWW
Device Settings tab features 237
System administrators can use the Form to Tray Assignment setting to specify, in the driver, the
paper size that is loaded into each available input tray. The use of forms constrains the choices that
are available in the paper-size list on the Paper/Quality tab in the Printing Preferences driver
tabs. This constraint prevents (or reduces the likelihood of) tying up the device with paper-mount
messages that occur when users request sizes or types that are not available.
The trays listed in the Form to Tray Assignment setting include standard trays and optional
accessory trays. Generally, items that are installed separately have a separate Installable Options
setting.
The input trays listed here are also listed as paper sources on the Paper/Quality tab.
Configuring the trays
1.
Select the appropriate tray in the Form to Tray Assignment list.
2.
Use the drop-down menu to select the paper size (or form) that is loaded in that tray.
3.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the remaining trays.
4.
Click OK to enable the settings, or, if necessary, click Cancel to reconfigure all the trays and
remove the size and type constraints that have been imposed on the Paper/Quality tab.
Font Substitution Table
Use the Font Substitution Table settings to install and remove external fonts for the device. External
fonts can be soft fonts or DIMM fonts.
Click the Font Substitution Table option to open a list of fonts, as show in the following figure. Use
the settings to change the TrueType-to-printer font mappings.
238 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Figure 5-32   Font Substitution Table
External Fonts
NOTE: The External Fonts option is available only in the HP PCL 6 and PCL 5 drivers. It is
not available in the PS Emulation driver.
Use the External Fonts option to install and remove external fonts for the device. External fonts can
be soft fonts or DIMM fonts.
Click the External Fonts option to make the Properties button available. Click Properties to
open the HP Font Installer dialog box, which is shown in the following figure.
ENWW
Device Settings tab features 239
Figure 5-33  HP Font Installer dialog box
Topics:
●
Installing external fonts
●
Removing external fonts
Installing external fonts
Follow these steps to install external fonts:
1.
Click Start.
2.
For Windows 2000, select Settings, and then click Printers.
For Windows Vista, Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003, click Printers and
Faxes.
For Windows XP Home, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Printers and Faxes
icon.
3.
Right-click the driver name.
4.
Click Properties.
5.
Click the Device Settings tab.
6.
Click the External Fonts option. The Properties button appears.
7.
Click Properties. The HP Font Installer dialog box appears.
8.
Type the name and path of the font metric file in the Printer Font File Location text box, or
click Browse to locate the file on the computer. The font file names appear in the Font(s) to be
Added window.
240 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
9.
Select the fonts to add, and then click Add. The fonts are installed and the file names appear in
the Installed Font(s) window.
10. Click OK to close the HP Font Installer dialog box.
Removing external fonts
1.
Click Start.
2.
For Windows 2000, select Settings, and then click Printers.
For Windows Vista, Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003, click Printers and
Faxes.
For Windows XP Home, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Printers and Faxes
icon.
3.
Right-click the driver name.
4.
Click Properties.
5.
Click the Device Settings tab.
6.
Click the External Fonts option. The Properties button appears.
7.
Click Properties. The HP Font Installer dialog box appears. The external fonts that are
installed appear in the Installed Fonts window.
8.
Select the fonts to remove, and then click Remove. The fonts are removed.
9.
Click OK to close the HP Font Installer dialog box.
PS Emulation driver Device Settings
The following controls are available and appear only in the PS Emulation driver Device Settings tab:
ENWW
●
Available PostScript Memory
●
Output Protocol
●
Send Ctrl-D Before Each Job
●
Send Ctrl-D After Each Job
●
Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray
●
Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray
●
Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts
●
Job Timeout
●
Wait Timeout
●
Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline
●
Maximum Font Size to Download as Bitmap
Device Settings tab features 241
Available PostScript Memory
This control specifies the amount of available postscript memory and provides a spin box for changing
this value. The available postscript memory is a subset of the device total physical memory. It is usually
best to set the postscript memory to match the total RAM that appears on the configuration page. To
print a configuration page from the device control panel:
1.
Touch Administration.
2.
Touch Information.
3.
Touch Configuration/Status Pages.
4.
Touch Configuration Page.
5.
Touch Print.
Output Protocol
This control specifies the protocol that the device uses for print jobs. The following options are available:
●
ASCII (default)
●
TBCP
●
Binary
Click ASCII to send data in ASCII format (7-bit), which might take longer to print but can be sent
through any I/O channel, such as a serial or network port.
Click TBCP (Tagged Binary Communications Protocol) to send all data except special control
characters in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over serial communications ports
and are faster than sending data in ASCII format.
Click Binary to send all data except special control characters in binary (8-bit) format. The binary
formats can be sent over serial communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format.
Send Ctrl-D Before Each Job
This control specifies whether the device is reset at the beginning of every postscript document. The
default setting is No. Pressing Ctrl-D resets the device to its default setting to ensure that previous print
jobs do not affect the current print job. Using Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the device is
connected through a network. If the document fails to print when sent to a device connected through
serial ports, change No to Yes.
Send Ctrl-D After Each Job
This control specifies whether the device is reset at the end of every postscript document. The default
setting is Yes. Pressing Ctrl-D resets the device to its default setting to ensure that future print jobs are
not affected by the current print job. Using Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the device is
connected through a network. If the document fails to print when sent to a network device, change
Yes to No.
242 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray
This control specifies whether to convert the true gray value (RGB) in text to the gray that the driver
provides. The following settings are available:
●
Yes
●
No (default)
Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray
This control specifies whether to convert the true gray value (RGB) in graphics to the gray provided by
the driver. The following settings are available:
●
Yes
●
No (default)
Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts
This control specifies whether to add the euro symbol to the device fonts. The following settings are
available:
●
Yes (default)
●
No
Job Timeout
This control specifies how long the document can take to get from the computer to the device before
the device stops trying to print the document. If you specify 0 seconds, the device continues trying to
print indefinitely. The default setting is 0 seconds. Use the spin box to change this value, up to a
maximum of 32,767 seconds.
Wait Timeout
This control specifies how long the device waits to get more postscript information from the computer.
After the specified time passes, the device stops trying to print the document and prints an error
message. When printing a very complicated document, increase this value. If you specify 0 seconds,
the device waits indefinitely. The default setting is 300 seconds. Use the spin box to change this
value, up to a maximum of 32,767 seconds.
Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline
This control specifies the minimum font size (in pixels) for which the driver downloads TrueType fonts as
outline (Type 1) fonts. Any font smaller than the minimum setting is downloaded as a bitmap (Type 3)
font. Use this option to fine-tune the Automatic setting for the TrueType Font Download option
on the Advanced tab in Document Defaults. The default setting is 100 pixel(s). Use the spin
box to change this value, up to a maximum of 32,767 pixels.
Maximum Font Size to Download as Bitmap
This control specifies the maximum font size (in pixels) for which the driver will download TrueType
fonts as bitmap (Type 3) fonts. Any font larger than the maximum setting will be downloaded as an
outline (Type 1) font. Use this option to fine-tune the Automatic setting or override the Send
TrueType as Bitmap setting for the TrueType Font Download option on the Advanced tab in
ENWW
Device Settings tab features 243
Document Defaults. The default setting is 600 pixel(s). Use the spin box to change this value, up
to a maximum of 32,767 pixels.
Installable Options
Topics:
●
Automatic Configuration
●
HP 4000-Sheet Input Tray (Tray 5)
●
Accessory Output Bin
●
Printer Memory
●
Printer Hard Disk
●
Job Storage
●
Mopier Mode
●
Mopier mode and collation
●
Postscript Passthrough (PS Emulation driver only)
●
JPEG Passthrough (PS Emulation driver only)
Automatic Configuration
Use the Device Settings tab to tell the driver about the hardware configuration of the device. If
bidirectional communication is enabled in a supported environment, set up this tab by selecting the
Update Now setting in the Automatic Configuration setting. The default setting is Off. After an
automatic configuration, the setting returns to Off after the changes are made.
If the computer environment does not support bidirectional communication, the Update Now setting
is unavailable, the options on this tab must be manually configured.
If more than one driver is installed for the device (for example, the default HP PCL 6 and PCL 5
drivers), the Update Now feature works automatically only on the driver on which it is activated. The
other driver will not be updated, and might show the default setting for the specific device model.
HP 4000-Sheet Input Tray (Tray 5)
This control specifies whether the optional high-capacity Tray 5 is installed on the device. The default
setting is Not Installed.
Accessory Output Bin
This control specifies whether the accessory output bin or an optional finisher is installed on the device.
The default setting is HP Single Output Bin.
Printer Memory
This option matches the setting to the amount of memory that is installed in the device. The driver
generates ranges of memory that can be selected, up to the maximum that the device can accept. The
driver can use this information to manage how the print driver uses the device memory.
244 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
Printer Hard Disk
When this option is enabled, the Job Storage option and the Mopier Mode are enabled in the
print driver. This option is enabled by default. Use the Job Storage option to store print jobs and
then print them later from the control panel. The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HPdesigned feature that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job.
NOTE: A hard disk is required for the device to perform most tasks. The check box is
available only for troubleshooting purposes.
Job Storage
When Job Storage is enabled, the device can store print jobs so that you can gain access to those
print jobs later at the control panel. This option is enabled by default.
Mopier Mode
This option is enabled by default.
CAUTION: Disabling Mopier Mode disrupts functionality for the Output and Finishing
tab features.
The multiple-original print (mopy) function is an HP-designed feature that produces multiple, collated
copies from a single print job. Multiple-original printing (mopying) increases performance and reduces
network traffic by transmitting the job to the device once, and then storing it in memory. The remainder
of the copies are printed at the fastest speed. All documents that are printed in mopier mode can be
created, controlled, managed, and finished from the computer, which eliminates the extra step of using
a photocopier.
The HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology supports the transmit-once mopying
feature when the Mopier Mode: setting on the Device Settings tab is Enabled.
Use the HP PCL 6, PCL 5, or PS Emulation driver to perform mopying in one of two ways: either
through the software or through the device hardware. When the mopier is enabled, mopying takes
place through the device hardware by default. One copy of a multiple-page print job is transmitted
once through the network to the device, together with a printer job language (PJL) command directing
the device to make the specified number of copies.
When the mopier is disabled, mopying is not necessarily disabled. The driver can perform through the
software rather than the device hardware (the mopying path that is disabled when you change the
Mopy Mode setting to Disabled). However, sending a multiple-copy print job when the mopier is
disabled eliminates the advantage of transmitting the print job once, because the job is sent through
the network for each copy.
Mopier mode and collation
CAUTION: Disabling Mopier Mode disrupts functionality for the Output and Finishing
tab features.
Mopying and collating print jobs are independent but closely related functions. The print driver
performs mopying, sending original print jobs to the device. The print driver or the document software
program control collation. The mopying mode is selected by default in the driver, and can be disabled
by changing the Mopier Mode setting on the Device Settings tab to Disabled.
ENWW
Device Settings tab features 245
Control collation through the print driver by selecting or clearing the Collated check box on the
Advanced tab. Clear the check box, which is available only when the Copy Count option is set to
more than 1 copy, to allow the software program to control collation.
To receive uncollated multiple copies of a print job, you must clear the Collated check box and make
sure that the software program collation feature is not selected.
The following table shows the relation between mopier mode settings and collation settings in the
software program and the driver. The first three columns show the settings. The last column, "Expected
result", shows how a 3-page print job would appear.
Table 5-4  Driver mopier mode and collation settings
Mopier mode
Application collation
Driver collation
Expected result
Disabled
Not selected
Not selected
3 copies uncollated
Disabled
Not selected
Selected
3 copies uncollated
Disabled
Selected
Not selected
3 copies collated
Disabled
Selected
Selected
3 copies collated
Enabled
Not selected
Not selected
3 copies uncollated
Enabled
Not selected
Selected
3 copies uncollated
Enabled
Selected
Not selected
3 copies collated
Enabled
Selected
Selected
3 copies collated
Postscript Passthrough (PS Emulation driver only)
Postscript Passthrough is enabled by default, and must be enabled for most print jobs. Postscript
passthrough provides additional capabilities for some software programs when printing to a postscript
driver. Options such as Watermarks, n-up and Booklet Printing might not print correctly from
some software programs with Postscript Passthrough enabled, because such programs send
postscript information that the driver cannot control. Other programs might print using these options
without problems. Select Disabled and print the document again if you encounter problems.
NOTE: In some cases, disabling Postscript Passthrough can cause unexpected results
within a software program.
JPEG Passthrough (PS Emulation driver only)
The JPEG Passthrough setting contains the following options:
●
Disable. When this option is selected, images sent as JPEG are printed as bitmaps, resulting in
faster printing.
●
Enable. When this option is selected, images sent as JPEG are printed as JPEG (JPEG
passthrough).
●
Auto. When this option is selected, the device connection type is automatically detected. For
network (TCP/IP) connections, JPEG passthrough is disabled. For DOT4 and USB connections,
JPEG passthrough is enabled.
246 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
About tab features
The About tab is in the Properties for the print driver. To gain access to the About tab:
1.
Click Start.
2.
For Windows 2000, select Settings, and then click Printers.
For Windows Vista, Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003, click Printers and
Faxes.
For Windows XP Home, click Control Panel, and then double-click the Printers and Faxes
icon.
3.
Right-click the driver name.
4.
Click Properties.
5.
Click the About tab.
The About tab provides detailed information about the driver. It contains an overall build number (in
parentheses after the model name) together with specific information about each of the components.
The information varies according to the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology
model number, driver, date, and versions. The About tab is shown in the following figure.
ENWW
About tab features 247
Figure 5-34  About tab
The About tab lists driver installation file names and their version numbers. The About tab also
indicates whether the driver was autoconfigured, whether administrator preferences were set, the date
the driver was last configured, and whether the configuration is default or user-defined.
To determine the latest version, compare the overall build number (in parenthesis after the model
name) and the GPD number (in the Driver Files: field). If the overall build number has increased, this is
the latest version of the driver.
If the overall build number is the same, check the version number of the GPD file. The driver that has
the highest GPD version number is the latest driver.
248 Chapter 5   HP PCL 6, PCL 5, and PS Emulation drivers for MS Windows
ENWW
6
Macintosh
Introduction
The HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology comes with printing software and
installers for Apple Computer, Inc., Macintosh operating systems.
Topics:
ENWW
●
Macintosh printing-system software
●
Macintosh install and uninstall instructions
●
HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
Introduction 249
Macintosh printing-system software
The HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology printing system for Macintosh is
composed of an HP-created postscript printer definition file (PPD) and printer dialog extension (PDEs)
files that work together with the Macintosh print system. These files are used by the Macintosh print
system to determine default print settings and also allows the user to select between the various print
options and settings and are installed by the provided installer. The following are provided on the
Macintosh installation CD:
●
The HP Installer for Macintosh
●
User documentation
●
Readme file
The following major components are installed by the installer for Macintosh:
●
HP HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology PPDs
●
HP HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology PDEs
Topics:
●
Hardware requirements
●
Operating-system support
●
Availability
Hardware requirements
●
PowerPC G3, G4, G5 or Intel Core processor
●
256 MB RAM
●
80 MB of available hard-disk space
●
CD-ROM drive or Internet connection
Operating-system support
●
Mac OS X v10.2.8, v10.3.9, v10.4 and later are supported.
●
Mac OS 9 and Mac OS X classic are not supported.
Availability
This STR provides information about the availability of the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with
Edgeline Technology printing-system software. Printing-system software on a CD is available with the
device, from the Web, and from HP fulfillment centers.
Topics:
●
Printing-system software on the Web
●
Macintosh installation CD
250 Chapter 6   Macintosh
ENWW
Printing-system software on the Web
All software that is contained on the Macintosh printing-system installation CD is also available on the
Web.
Web deployment is the preferred method for obtaining the latest software. The Web site offers an
option for automatic e-mail notification about new software releases.
NOTE: This document describes drivers that are shipped with the printing-system installation
CD. This document does not describe any drivers that might be released by support personnel.
Topics:
●
Printing-system software
●
Software component availability
Printing-system software
The HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology printing-system software is available
for download at one of the following Web sites:
www.hp.com/support/CM8060edgeline
www.hp.com/support/CM8050edgeline
Software component availability
The following software components are installed:
●
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline TechnologyPPD
●
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology PDE
Macintosh installation CD
The Macintosh installation CD for theHP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology
contains the files for installing the printing-system software on the computer.
Topics:
●
Macintosh installation CD
●
Macintosh installation CD languages
Macintosh installation CD
The installer for Macintosh is at the root of the Macintosh installation CD. The user manuals (in PDF
format) are grouped by language and are in the Documentation directory on the Macintosh installation
CD.
Macintosh installation CD languages
The Macintosh installation CD for the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology
contains the files for installing the printing-system software on the computer.
ENWW
Macintosh printing-system software 251
The HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Macintosh installation CD contains
printing-system software in various languages, as follows:
●
Macintosh installation CD (part number C5956–61105):
●
DA = Danish (Dansk)
●
DE = German (Deutsch)
●
EN = English
●
ES = Spanish (Español)
●
FI = Finnish (Suomi)
●
FR = French (Français)
●
IT = Italian (Italiano)
●
JA = Japanese
●
KO = Korean
●
NL = Dutch (Nederland)
●
NO = Norwegian (Norsk)
●
PT = Brazilian Portuguese (Português)
●
SV = Swedish (Svenska)
●
ZHCN = Simplified Chinese
●
ZHTW = Traditional Chinese
User documentation is also available in all languages that MS Windows supports. For more
information, see HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology documentation
on page 17 in this STR.
252 Chapter 6   Macintosh
ENWW
Macintosh install and uninstall instructions
The HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology comes with software and installers
for MS Windows and Apple Computer, Inc., Macintosh systems. This STR provides procedures for
installing and removing the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology printingsystem software for Macintosh operating systems.
Topics:
●
Macintosh component descriptions
●
Install the Macintosh printing system
●
Uninstall the Macintosh printing system
Macintosh component descriptions
The device includes the following software for Macintosh computers:
●
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology PPDs
●
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology PDEs
Topics:
●
HP PPDs
●
PDEs
●
HP Embedded Web Server
●
Readme file
HP PPDs
In Mac OS X V10.2.8 and later, the PPDs are installed in Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/
Resources:<lang>.lproj, where <lang> is the appropriate localized folder.
The PPDs, in combination with the driver, provide access to the device configuration settings and
installable options. These settings are usually configured during the installation process by using Apple
Mac OS X tools such as Print Center, Printer Setup Utility, and Print & Fax. For more information, see
Table 6-1 Adding a device in Macintosh operating systems on page 255.
PDEs
Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs) are code plug-ins (for Mac OS X V10.2.8 and later only) that
provide access to device features, such as number of copies, duplexing, and quality settings.
HP Embedded Web Server
Mac OS X supports the HP Embedded Web Server (HP EWS). Use the HP EWS to perform the
following tasks:
ENWW
●
View the device status and change device settings.
●
View and change network settings for the device.
Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 253
●
Print information pages for the device.
●
View the device event log.
The HP EWS is accessed by using a Web browser such as Safari.
Readme file
This text file contains information about basic device installation and OS support.
Install the Macintosh printing system
On a Macintosh computer, the installation procedures are basically the same for a system
administrator, a network client, and a single user. Install the software on any computer that has access
rights to the device. The computer user must have administrative rights on the computer in order to
install the software.
Topics:
●
General installation for Macintosh operating systems
●
Detailed Mac OS X installation
●
Printer setup
General installation for Macintosh operating systems
1.
Connect the network cable to the device network port.
2.
Insert the Macintosh printing-system software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
NOTE: If the CD screen does not open automatically, double-click the HP CM8060/
CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology CD-ROM icon on the desktop to
open the CD-ROM window.
3.
Double-click the HP CM8050 CM8060 MFP v6.11.0.5xx icon.
NOTE: The Continue button appears only after you type the "admin" password in the
Authenticate dialog.
4.
The main Installer dialog appears. Click Install and then follow the onscreen instructions to
complete the software installation.
NOTE: When you are installing the printing-system software, be patient. The installer
must perform an initial search of the computer for up to 1 minute. During this time the
installer might appear to be stalled.
5.
When software installation is complete, click Quit.
6.
Continue with the steps for setting up a device.
The software program that you use to finish setting up the device varies by operating system. The
following table shows the print setup tools that are available.
254 Chapter 6   Macintosh
ENWW
Table 6-1  Adding a device in Macintosh operating systems
Operating System
Print Center
Printer Setup Utility
Print & Fax
Mac OS X V10.2.8
x
 
 
Mac OS X V10.3.9
 
x
x
Mac OS X V10.4 and later
 
x
x
Detailed Mac OS X installation
Topics:
●
Main Install dialog sequence
Main Install dialog sequence
This section provides information about the Macintosh installation dialog-box sequence for the Easy
Install (the typical installation option).
Insert the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology Macintosh printing-system
software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
If the CD screen does not open automatically when the CD is put into the CD-ROM drive, double-click
the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology CD-ROM icon on the
desktop to open the installer folder.
Figure 6-1  HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology CD-ROM icon
The HP CM8060/CM8050 MFP dialog opens.
Figure 6-2  HP CM8060/CM8050 MFP screen
In the HP CM8060/CM8050 MFP screen, double-click the HP CM8050 CM8060 MFP
v6.11.0.5xx icon. This begins the installation process.
ENWW
Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 255
The Authenticate dialog appears.
In theHP CM8060/CM8050 MFP screen, double-click the Documentation icon to view user
documentation.
Figure 6-3  Authenticate dialog
Type the correct administrator name and password and click OK to continue. The installer startup
screen appears.
Click Cancel to exit the installation.
Figure 6-4  HP Macintosh installer introduction dialog
Click Continue. The Read Me dialog appears, as shown in the following figure.
256 Chapter 6   Macintosh
ENWW
Figure 6-5  HP Installer Read Me dialog
Click Print… to open the Page Setup dialog for the default device and print a copy of the readme.
Click Save… to open the system Save dialog and save the readme to disk.
Click Go Back to return to the previous screen.
Click Continue to continue the installation. The License dialog appears.
Figure 6-6  License dialog
Click Print… to open the Page Setup dialog for the default device and print a copy of the license
agreement.
Click Save… to open the system Save dialog and save the license agreement to disk.
Read the software-license agreement and then click Continue to continue the installation. A dialog
appears, asking you to accept the license agreement, as shown in the following figure.
ENWW
Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 257
Figure 6-7  Agree dialog
Click Disagree to decline the agreement, end the installation process, and close the installer.
Click Agree to accept the agreement. The Easy Install dialog appears, as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 6-8  Easy Install dialog
The default option is Easy Install.
Click Go Back to return to the previous screen.
Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk. The Installing screen appears, as shown in
the following figure.
258 Chapter 6   Macintosh
ENWW
Figure 6-9  Installing dialog
The Installing dialog shows installation progress. No action is required unless you want to stop the
installation.
Click Stop to interrupt the install file copy process.
The Finish Up dialog appears, stating that the installation was successful, as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 6-10  Finish Up dialog
Click Quit to exit the installer.
ENWW
Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 259
Click Continue to return to the HP Installer.
Printer setup
After installing the printing-system software in Macintosh operating systems, the device must be set up.
Follow these instructions to set up a printer queue for the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with
Edgeline Technology.
Topics:
●
Set up a printer with Mac OS X V10.4 and later
●
Set up a printer with Mac OS X V10.3.9
●
Set up a printer with Mac OS X V10.2.8
●
Troubleshooting the printer setup
Set up a printer with Mac OS X V10.4 and later
Carry out these steps after the software installation is complete.
1.
Verify that the network cable is connected to the device and the device is on.
260 Chapter 6   Macintosh
ENWW
2.
In the Applications folder, open the Utilities folder, and then run the Printer Setup Utility.
The Printer List appears. It looks similar to the one shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-11  Printer list screen
You can also configure the device using the Print & Fax pane of System Preferences (from
the Apple menu, choose System Preferences..., then choose Print & Fax).
Figure 6-12  Print & Fax dialog
3.
Click Add in the Printer List (or the + button in the Print & Fax utility) to open the Printer
Browser screen.
4.
You can use either Bonjour or IP Printing for the network connection.
NOTE: Bonjour is the easiest method and is the best method to use if the device is
installed on your local network.
IP Printing must be used if you are installing the device on a different network.
ENWW
Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 261
If you are using Bonjour, carry out the following steps:
a.
Click the Default Browser tab.
Figure 6-13  Default Browser tab
b.
Select the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology from the list. The
software verifies that the device is connected to the network and the Print Using field is
automatically populated with the correct PPD for the device.
NOTE: If you are on a network that has more than one HP CM8060/CM8050
Color MFP with Edgeline Technology, print a configuration page and match the
Bonjour Printer Name to the name on the list to identify the device you are installing.
(See Print the configuration page on page 275.)
NOTE: If the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology does not
appear in the list, verify that the device is on and connected to the network, then try
turning the device off and then on again. If the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color
MFP with Edgeline Technology PPD does not appear in the Print Using pulldown list, turn the computer off and then on again, then restart the setup process. For
more troubleshooting information, see Troubleshooting the printer setup on page 271.
262 Chapter 6   Macintosh
ENWW
If you want to use the IP Printing method, carry out the following steps:
a.
Click the IP Printer tab.
Figure 6-14  Printer Browser – IP Printer tab
b.
Choose HP Jet Direct – Socket from the Protocol pull-down menu. This is the
recommended setting for HP device.
c.
On the device control panel, print the configuration pages.
To print a configuration page, follow these instructions.
i.
Touch Administration.
ii.
Touch Information.
iii.
Touch Configuration Page.
iv.
Touch Print.
The device prints the configuration page.
ENWW
d.
On the first configuration page, under Product Settings, find the IP Address. Type this
address into the Address field on the add printer screen.
e.
The Name, Location, and Print Using information will automatically be filled in. If the
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology PPD does not appear
in the Print Using field, turn the computer off and then on again and restart the setup
process.
Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 263
5.
Click Add. The Installable Options screen appears.
Figure 6-15  Installable Options screen
6.
If the device has Tray 5, change the setting from Not Installed to Installed.
7.
Select the appropriate Accessory Output Bins option.
8.
Select the appropriate Paper Matching option.
9.
After selecting the installable options, click Continue. The device name appears in the Printer
List and the setup is complete.
Figure 6-16  Printer List screen
Set up a printer with Mac OS X V10.3.9
1.
Verify that the network cable is connected to the device and the device is on.
264 Chapter 6   Macintosh
ENWW
2.
In the Applications folder, open the Utilities folder, and then run the Printer Setup Utility.
The Printer List appears. It looks similar to the one shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-17  Printer List screen
You can also configure the device using the Print & Fax pane of System Preferences (from
the Apple menu, choose System Preferences..., then choose Print & Fax).
Figure 6-18  Print & Fax screen
ENWW
Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 265
3.
Click Add (or the Set Up Printers... button in the Print & Fax screen, and then Add) to open
the add printer screen.
Figure 6-19  Add printer screen
4.
Select the network connection protocol in the top pull-down menu. The two supported protocols
are Rendezvous and IP Printing.
NOTE: Rendezvous is the easiest method and is the best method to use if the device is
installed on your local network.
IP Printing must be used if you are installing the device on a different network.
If you are using Rendezvous, carry out the following step:
Select the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology in the Name list. The
Printer Model and Model Name are selected automatically.
NOTE: If you are on a network that has more than one HP CM8060/CM8050 Color
MFP with Edgeline Technology, print a configuration page and match the Rendezvous
Printer Name to the name on the list to identify the device you are installing. (See Print the
configuration page on page 275.)
266 Chapter 6   Macintosh
ENWW
NOTE: If the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology does not
appear in the list, verify that the device is powered on and connected to the network. If it
still does not appear, try turning the device off and then on again. Finally, turn the
computer off and then on again, then restart the setup process. For more troubleshooting
information, see Troubleshooting the printer setup on page 271.
NOTE: If the automatic selection fails, or if you want to manually select a .PPD file, click
the Printer Model pull-down menu, select HP, and then select the .PPD file that you want
to add. If the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology PPD
does not appear in the Model Name list, turn the computer off and then on again and
restart the setup process.
If you are using IP Printing, carry out the following steps:
a.
Choose Socket/HP Jet Direct from the Printer Type pull-down menu. This is the
recommended setting for HP devices.
b.
On the device control panel, print the configuration pages.
To print a configuration page, follow these instructions.
i.
Touch Administration.
ii.
Touch Information.
iii.
Touch Configuration Page.
iv.
Touch Print.
The device prints the configuration page.
5.
ENWW
c.
On the first configuration page, under Product Settings, find the IP Address. Type this
address into the Printer Address field on the add printer screen.
d.
Select the Printer Model and select HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline
Technology in the Model Name list. If the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with
Edgeline Technology PPD does not appear in the Model Name list, turn the computer
off and then on again and restart the setup process.
Click Add. The HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology appears in the
Printer List.
Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 267
6.
To configure installable options, click Show Info? on the device list and choose Installable
Options in the pull-down menu.
Figure 6-20  Installable Options screen
7.
If the device has Tray 5, change the setting from Not Installed to Installed.
8.
Select the appropriate Accessory Output Bins option.
9.
Select the appropriate Paper Matching option.
10. Click Apply Changes, and then close the Printer List dialog.
Set up a printer with Mac OS X V10.2.8
1.
Verify that the network cable is connected to the device and the device is on.
2.
In the Applications folder, open the Utilities folder, and then run the Print Center. The
Printer List screen appears. It looks similar to the one shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-21  Printer List screen
268 Chapter 6   Macintosh
ENWW
3.
Click Add to open the add device screen.
Figure 6-22  Add printer screen
4.
Choose the network connection protocol in the top drop-down menu. The two supported protocols
are Rendezvous and IP Printing.
If you are using Rendezvous, carry out the following step:
NOTE: Rendezvous is the easiest method and is the best method to use if the device is
installed on your local network.
IP Printing must be used if you are installing the device on a different network.
If you are using Rendezvous, carry out the following step:
Select the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology in the Name list. The
Printer Model and Model Name are selected automatically.
NOTE: If you are on a network that has more than one HP CM8060/CM8050 Color
MFP with Edgeline Technology, print a configuration page and match the Rendezvous
Printer Name to the name on the list to identify the device you are installing. (See Print the
configuration page on page 275.)
NOTE: If the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology does not
appear in the list, verify that the device is powered on and connected to the network. If it
still does not appear, try turning the device off and then on again. Finally, turn the
computer off and then on again, then restart the setup process. For more troubleshooting
information, see Troubleshooting the printer setup on page 271.
ENWW
Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 269
NOTE: If the automatic selection fails, or if you want to manually select a PPD file, click
the Printer Model drop-down menu, choose HP, and then choose the PPD file that you
want to add. If the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology
PPD does not appear in the Model Name list, turn the computer off and then on again
and restart the setup process.
If you are using IP Printing, carry out the following steps:
a.
On the device control panel, print the configuration pages.
To print a configuration page, follow these instructions.
i.
Touch Administration.
ii.
Touch Information.
iii.
Touch Configuration Page.
iv.
Touch Print.
The device prints the configuration page.
b.
On the first configuration page, under Product Settings, find the IP Address. Type this
address into the Printer's Address field.
c.
Choose Printer Model and then choose the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with
Edgeline Technology in the Model Name list.
5.
Click Add. The HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology appears in the
Printer List.
6.
Select the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology, go to the Printers
menu, and choose Show Info.
7.
Choose Installable Options from the top drop-down menu.
Figure 6-23  Installable Options screen
8.
If the device has Tray 5, change the setting from Not Installed to Installed.
9.
Select the appropriate Accessory Output Bins option.
270 Chapter 6   Macintosh
ENWW
10. Select the appropriate Paper Matching option.
11. Click Apply Changes, and then close the Printer List dialog.
Troubleshooting the printer setup
If the printer does not appear in the printer list after an installation:
Carry out each one of these solutions in the order given, and restart the setup process after each one
to see if the issue has been resolved.
●
Verify that the network cable is connected between the device and the computer and that the
device is powered on.
●
Try disconnecting and reconnecting the cable.
●
Turn the device off and then back on again.
●
Turn the computer off and then back on again.
Uninstall the Macintosh printing system
Follow these instructions to uninstall the Macintosh Printing System.
1.
Browse to the folder containing the PPDs. In Mac OS X V10.2.8 or later, the PPDs are installed
in System/Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources:<lang>.lproj, where <lang>
is the appropriate language.
2.
Choose the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology.gz file and
drag it to Trash.
3.
Empty the Trash.
4.
Delete the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology device from the printer list.
HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
The HP EWS is embedded in the device firmware. It is a series of Web pages that provide access to
device status and configuration options.
Topics:
●
Access to the HP EWS
Access to the HP EWS
Use the following method to gain access to the HP EWS:
Using a Web browser:
NOTE:
1.
ENWW
This method can only be used if the device is using a network connection.
On the device control panel, print the configuration pages.
HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) 271
To print a configuration page, follow these instructions.
a.
Touch Administration.
b.
Touch Information.
c.
Touch Configuration Page.
d.
Touch Print.
The device prints the configuration page.
2.
On the first configuration page, under Product Settings, find the IP Address. Type this address
into a Web browser such as Safari. The Device Status screen appears.
For detailed information about the HP EWS, see HP Embedded Web Server on page 47 in this STR,
and see the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology System Administrator Guide,
which is available on the System Administrator's CD.
272 Chapter 6   Macintosh
ENWW
7
Engineering details
Introduction
Topics:
ENWW
●
Remote firmware updates
●
Print print-ready documents
●
Paper attributes
●
Uninstall
Introduction 273
Remote firmware updates
The HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology features remote firmware update
(RFU) capability. The method for downloading remote firmware updates from the Web site is similar to
that used to download the latest printing-system software and print drivers.
The process for remotely upgrading firmware involves three steps:
1.
Print a configuration page to see what version of firmware is currently installed on the device.
(Also, print a menu map to see what user settings have been configured.)
2.
Go to the HP Web site and download the latest firmware to the computer.
3.
Download the new firmware to the device. Print a new menu map to compare user settings
between the previous firmware and upgraded firmware.
Table 7-1  Version Checking
Primary/Location
Version Checking
JetDirect inside (JDI)
Does version checking.
Upgrades if the firmware version is newer; this means it will
not rewrite or upgrade if the firmware is the same or older.
This becomes an issue if the current firmware is corrupt.
Because the firmware version may be the same even though it
may be corrupt, the firmware will not rewrite because it is the
same version.
To update corrupt firmware with the same RFU version, use
the nodebug bundle of firmware, then update using the
correct firmware bundle.
Fax Modem
Does version checking.
The firmware updates if the RFU is different from what is
currently on the component. The firmware can be updated if
the RFU is older or newer than the current firmware version.
Will not upgrade if firmware version is the same. The same
version does not rewrite because of speed.
This becomes an issue if the current firmware is corrupt.
Because the firmware version may be the same even though it
may be corrupt, the firmware will not rewrite because it is the
same version.
Formatter
No version checking.
The formatter firmware updates if there is a formatter bundle
on the RFU, and is not dependant on what version of
firmware the formatter is currently using.
Copy control board (CPB)
No version checking.
Scan control board (SCB)
Does version checking.
Upgrades if the firmware version is newer; this means it will
not rewrite or upgrade if the firmware is the same or older.
274 Chapter 7   Engineering details
ENWW
Table 7-1  Version Checking (continued)
This becomes an issue if the current firmware is corrupt.
Because the firmware version may be the same even though it
may be corrupt, the firmware will not rewrite because it is the
same version.
To update corrupt firmware with the same RFU version, use
the nodebug bundle of firmware, then update using the
correct firmware bundle.
Jetlink protocol
No version checking.
(interface used to hook up output devices; external to the
device)
DC controller
Does version checking.
(internal to the device)
●
duplexer
The firmware updates if the RFU is different from what is
currently on the component. The firmware can be updated if
the RFU is older or newer than the current firmware version.
●
input external trays
Will not upgrade if firmware version is the same.
●
output external bins
This becomes an issue if the current firmware is corrupt.
Because the firmware version may be the same even though it
may be corrupt, the firmware will not rewrite because it is the
same version.
Topics:
●
Print the configuration page
●
Download the new firmware from the HP Web site
●
Download the new firmware to the device
●
Printer messages during the firmware update
●
Remote firmware update by using FTP on a direct network connection
●
Remote firmware update through an optional parallel port
●
Remote firmware update through an MS Windows network
●
Remote firmware update for UNIX systems
●
Remote firmware update by using the LPR command
●
Remote firmware update through HP Web Jetadmin
Print the configuration page
To determine the current level of firmware, view the configuration page.
To print a configuration page, follow these instructions.
ENWW
1.
Touch Administration.
2.
Touch Information.
Remote firmware updates 275
3.
Touch Configuration Page.
4.
Touch Print.
Print a menu map
Print a menu map before updating the firmware to see what user settings have been configured in the
current firmware. This menu map can be compared with a menu map printed after the firmware
update to determine what user settings have been added or changed in the new firmware.
To print a menu map from the device control panel:
1.
Touch Administration.
2.
Touch Information.
3.
Touch Configuration/Status Pages.
4.
Touch Administration Menu Map.
5.
Touch Print.
Download the new firmware from the HP Web site
The remote firmware update (.RFU) file and an associated readme file are packaged together as a selfextracting .EXE file. For detailed instructions about how to download the .EXE file, go to one of the
following Web sites:
www.hp.com/go/CM8060edgeline_sw
www.hp.com/go/CM8050edgeline_sw
The .EXE file consists of a readme file and the .RFU file.
For UNIX systems, the remote firmware update file is a .TAR file.
Download the new firmware to the device
For support information about downloading new firmware from the Web, go to one of the following
Web sites:
www.hp.com/go/CM8060edgeline_sw
www.hp.com/go/CM8050edgeline_sw
The device can receive an RFU update when in the READY state. The device waits for all of the I/O
channels to become idle before performing the update.
NOTE: If the firmware update involves a change in the format of nonvolatile random-access
memory (NVRAM), any menu settings that are changed from the default settings will return to
default settings. The settings must be changed again if you want them to be different from the
defaults. Examples of settings that are affected in this way are tray types, default symbol sets,
and Web-access alerts.
The elapsed time for an update depends on the I/O transfer time, as well as the time that it takes for
the device to reinitialize. The I/O transfer time depends on a number of things, including the speed of
the host computer that is sending the update and the I/O method (network). The reinitialization time
276 Chapter 7   Engineering details
ENWW
depends on the specific hardware configuration of the device, such as the number of EIO devices
installed, the presence of external paper-handling devices, and the amount of memory that is installed.
Finally, any print jobs that are ahead of the RFU job in the queue are printed before the update is
processed.
Use one of the methods described in this manual to update the device firmware.
Printer messages during the firmware update
The following table lists the causes and results of possible interruptions to the firmware update.
Table 7-2  Troubleshooting a firmware update
Cause
Result
The job was cancelled from the control panel.
No update has occurred.
A break in the I/O stream occurred during send (for
example, the network cable was removed).
No update has occurred.
A power cycle occurred during the RECEIVING UPGRADE
process.
No update has occurred.
A power cycle occurred during the PERFORMING
UPGRADE process.
No update has occurred. Resend the update through a USB
port.
A power cycle occurred during the INITIALIZING process.
The update has been completed.
Print jobs that are sent to the device while an update is in process do not interrupt the update.
All HP devices leave the factory with the most recent firmware version installed. If a remote firmware
update fails for the component, the .RFU file must be resent. The only component exception is the
formatter. See Table 7-3 Update messages on page 277 for information regarding a formatter update
error.
Because a firmware update cannot be resent over a USB for Macintosh, contact an HP Customer Care
Center if a remote update fails in a Macintosh operating system.
Three messages appear during a normal update process; others appear only if the update process
does not succeed.
Table 7-3  Update messages
Device message
Explanation
RECEIVING UPGRADE
This message appears from the time the device recognizes the beginning of
an .RFU update until the time the device has verified the validity and integrity of
the .RFU update.
NOTE: If the remote firmware update process is interrupted before the
firmware is downloaded (while RECEIVING UPGRADE appears on
the control-panel display), the firmware file must be sent again. No
message appears on the device control panel to indicate that the
update was interrupted.
PERFORMING UPGRADE
ENWW
This message appears while the device is actually reprogramming the firmware.
Remote firmware updates 277
Table 7-3  Update messages (continued)
Device message
Explanation
NOTE: If power is lost during the flash DIMM update (while
PERFORMING UPGRADE appears on the control-panel display), the
update is interrupted and the message RESEND UPGRADE appears
on the control-panel display.
INITIALIZING
This message appears from the time the device has finished reprogramming the
flash until the device reinitializes.
RESEND UPGRADE
This message appears (in English only) if the firmware update fails because the
RFU process is interrupted. It can also occur if firmware for accessories (such as
the duplex unit or an output device becomes is corrupted. Perform another
update by any means that is supported by the device, regardless of the
connection (network or USB).
RFU LOAD ERROR
This message appears (in English only) if the firmware update of the formatter
fails because the print-engine firmware is corrupted.
SEND RFU UPGRADE
ON USB PORT
If this message appears, the update must now be sent only by a computer that is
attached to the USB port of the device.
NOTE: To verify that the firmware update succeeded, print a new configuration page from the
control panel and verify that the firmware date code on the configuration page has changed.
The following table lists possible reasons for the failure of a remote firmware update and the corrective
action required for each situation.
Table 7-4  Troubleshooting a firmware update failure
Reason for firmware update
failure
Corrective action
The .RFU file is corrupted.
The device recognizes that the file is corrupted and rejects the update. Download
the file again and send the new file to the device. Download the file from one of
the following Web sites:
www.hp.com/go/CM8060edgeline_sw
www.hp.com/go/CM8050edgeline_sw
The wrong device is contained in
the .RFU file.
The device recognizes the device mismatch and rejects the update. Download the
correct file and send it to the device. Download the file from one of the following
Web sites:
www.hp.com/go/CM8060edgeline_sw
www.hp.com/go/CM8050edgeline_sw
The upgrade was interrupted.
See Table 7-3 Update messages on page 277.
A flash hardware failure occurred.
Although it is extremely unlikely, the device might have a hardware failure. Call
technical support to address the problem (see the flyer that came with the device
for a local telephone support list).
278 Chapter 7   Engineering details
ENWW
Remote firmware update by using FTP on a direct network
connection
If the device uses a direct network connection, use file transfer protocol (FTP) to update the firmware.
Complete the following steps:
1.
Make note of the TCP/IP address on the HP Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded
Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration
page, see Print the configuration page on page 275.
NOTE: Before connecting to the device, make sure that the device is not in Powersave
mode. Also make sure that any error messages are cleared from the control-panel display.
2.
Open a command window on the computer.
3.
Type ftp://<TCP/IP printer ADDRESS>. For example, if the TCP/IP address is
192.168.0.90, type ftp://192.168.0.90.
4.
Press Enter on the keyboard.
5.
When prompted for the user name, press Enter.
6.
When prompted for the password, press Enter.
7.
Type bin at the command prompt.
8.
Press Enter. The message 200 Type set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files
appears in the command window.
9.
Type put <FILENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file that was downloaded
from the Web, including the path. For example, type put C:\LJ\xxxxFW.RFU, and then press
Enter.
NOTE: If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path
in quotation marks. For example, type the following path:
put "c:\My Documents\CM8060\xxxxfw.rfu"
The following series of messages appears in the command window:
200 PORT command successful
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection
226 Ready
226 Processing Job
226 Transfer complete
After these messages appear, a message containing transfer-speed information appears.
10. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the device. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the device or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update on page 277
appear on the control panel.
ENWW
Remote firmware updates 279
NOTE: The device automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the device or interfere with the update until
you see this message.
11. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of
the current update.
12. At the command prompt, type bye to exit the FTP command.
13. At the command prompt, type exit to return to the MS Windows interface.
NOTE: Print a menu map to see what user settings are configured in the current firmware. This
menu map can be compared with a menu map printed before the firmware update to determine
what user settings have been added or changed in the new firmware.
To print a menu map from the device control panel, see Print a menu map on page 276.
Remote firmware update through an optional parallel port
If the device is connected through an optional parallel connection, then you can send the .RFU file
directly to the device by using a COPY command from a command prompt or an MS-DOS window.
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
The .RFU file can be sent directly to the device by typing a copy command at a command prompt or
in an MS-DOS window.
Windows NT 4.0 does not support the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology
drivers, but it is possible to update the device firmware in Windows NT 4.0.
1.
At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME> , where <FILENAME> is the
name of the .RFU file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate
device port (such as LPT1). For example, type the following:
C:\>copy /b c:\xxxxfw.rfu LPT1
NOTE: If the file name or path includes a space, enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents
\xxxxfw.rfu" LPT1.
2.
Press Enter on the keyboard.
3.
The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the device. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the device or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update on page 277
appear on the control panel.
NOTE: The device automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the device or interfere with the update until
you see this message.
280 Chapter 7   Engineering details
ENWW
4.
Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of
the current update.
5.
At the command prompt, type exit to close the command window.
NOTE: Print a menu map to see what user settings are configured in the current firmware. This
menu map can be compared with a menu map printed before the firmware update to determine
what user settings have been added or changed in the new firmware.
To print a menu map from the device control panel, see Print a menu map on page 276.
Remote firmware update through an MS Windows network
If the device is shared on an MS Windows network, follow these instructions:
1.
From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type copy /b <FILENAME> \
\<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file (including
the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer (connected to the device by a USB)
from which the device is being shared, and <SHARENAME> is the device share name. For
example, type the following:
C:\>copy /b c:\xxxxfw.rfu \\COMPUTERNAME\SHARENAME
NOTE: If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path
in quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents
\xxxxfw.rfu" \\COMPUTERNAME\SHARENAME
2.
Press Enter on the keyboard. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the
firmware update on page 277 appear on the control panel. The message 1 file(s) copied
appears on the computer screen.
3.
The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the device. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the device or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update on page 277
appear on the control panel.
NOTE: The device automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the device or interfere with the update until
you see this message.
4.
Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of
the current update.
NOTE: Print a menu map to see what user settings are configured in the current firmware. This
menu map can be compared with a menu map printed before the firmware update to determine
what user settings have been added or changed in the new firmware.
To print a menu map from the device control panel, see Print a menu map on page 276.
ENWW
Remote firmware updates 281
To share the device, do the following:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Click Settings.
3.
Click Properties (Windows 2000) or Printers or Faxes (Windows XP Professional and
Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4.
Right-click the device name.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the Sharing tab.
7.
Click the Share this printer button.
8.
Enter a share name.
9.
Click Apply. Then, click OK to close.
Remote firmware update for UNIX systems
For UNIX systems, any command method that delivers the .TAR file to the device is acceptable,
including the following:
1.
At the command prompt, type cp </home/yourmachine/FILENAME /dev/parallel>,
where </home/yourmachine/FILENAME> is the location of the .TAR file.
2.
The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the device. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the device or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update on page 277
appear on the control panel.
NOTE: The device automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the device or interfere with the update until
this message appears.
3.
Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of
the current update.
NOTE: Print a menu map to see what user settings are configured in the current firmware. This
menu map can be compared with a menu map printed before the firmware update to determine
what user settings have been added or changed in the new firmware.
To print a menu map from the device control panel, see Print a menu map on page 276.
Remote firmware update by using the LPR command
NOTE: This remote firmware update method is for use in Windows NT 4.0,
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003.
282 Chapter 7   Engineering details
ENWW
Complete the following steps to update the firmware by using the LPR command.
1.
From a command window, type lpr -P <IPADDRESS> -S <IPADDRESS> -o l
<FILENAME> -OR- lpr -S <IPADDRESS> -Pbinps <FILENAME>, where <IPADDRESS> can
be either the TCP/IP address or the hostname of the device, and where <FILENAME> is the
filename of the .RFU file.
NOTE: The parameter (-o l) consists of a lowercase "O", not a zero, and a lowercase
"L", not the numeral 1. This parameter sets the transport protocol to binary mode.
2.
Press Enter on the keyboard. The messages described in the section Printer messages during the
firmware update on page 277 appear on the control panel.
3.
The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the device. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the device or the computer.
NOTE: The device automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the device or interfere with the update until
you see this message.
4.
Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of
the current update.
5.
Type exit at the command prompt to close the command window.
NOTE: Print a menu map to see what user settings are configured in the current firmware. This
menu map can be compared with a menu map printed before the firmware update to determine
what user settings have been added or changed in the new firmware.
To print a menu map from the device control panel, see Print a menu map on page 276.
Remote firmware update through HP Web Jetadmin
This procedure requires that HP Web Jetadmin V7.8 or later is installed on the computer. Complete
the following steps to update a single device through HP Web Jetadmin after downloading the .RFU
file from the HP Web site.
ENWW
1.
Start HP Web Jetadmin.
2.
Type the TCP/IP address or IP host name of the device in the Quick Device Find field, and then
click Go. The device Status window opens.
3.
Open the Device Management folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel. Navigate
to the Device Lists folder.
4.
Expand the Device Lists folder and select All Devices. Locate the device that you want to
update in the list of devices, and click to select it.
5.
Locate the drop-down box for Device Tools in the upper-right corner of the window. Select
Update Printer Firmware from the choose action list.
6.
If the name of the .RFU file is not listed in the All Available Images dialog box, click Browse
in the Upload New Firmware Image dialog box and navigate to the location of the .RFU
file that you downloaded from the Web. If the filename is listed, select it.
Remote firmware updates 283
7.
Click Upload to move the .RFU file from your hard drive to the HP Web Jetadmin server.
8.
Refresh the browser.
9.
Select the .RFU file from the Printer Firmware Update drop-down menu.
10. Click Update Firmware. HP Web Jetadmin sends the selected .RFU file to the device.
11. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the device. This can take several
minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the device or the computer. The
messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update on page 277
appear on the control panel.
NOTE: The device automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update; this
can happen more than once. At the end of the update process, the READY message
appears on the control panel. Do not turn off the device or interfere with the update until
you see this message.
12. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of
the current update.
NOTE: Print a menu map to see what user settings are configured in the current firmware. This
menu map can be compared with a menu map printed before the firmware update to determine
what features have been added or changed in the new firmware.
To print a menu map from the device control panel, see Print a menu map on page 276.
HP Web Jetadmin V7.8 and later can also be used to perform multiple or unattended installations.
Complete the following steps for multiple or unattended installations.
1.
Start HP Web Jetadmin.
2.
Create a device group. A simple way to do this is to follow these steps:
a.
Click Device Management, and then click All Devices.
b.
Shift-click to select devices that are to be included in the group, and then click OK.
c.
When prompted, type a name for the new device group, and then click OK.
3.
To modify several devices in a group, click the group name, and then click Open.
4.
The drop-down menu for Device Group Tools appears on the right side of the window. Scroll
if necessary to view it.
5.
In the Device Group Tools drop-down box, select an action. Type the appropriate information.
Click Return to Device Group when finished.
284 Chapter 7   Engineering details
ENWW
Print print-ready documents
Several methods are available for printing documents independently of the original software program
that was used to create the document. Normally, the document is printed by opening the original
application and printing it to a file, or is printed through a distribution method such as Internet
downloading. The following print-ready file formats can be sent directly to the HP CM8060/CM8050
Color MFP with Edgeline Technology without opening the original software program:
●
HP printer control language (.PCL)
●
Portable document format (.PDF)
●
Postscript (.PS)
●
Text (.TXT)
●
Print file (.PRN)
The examples that are used in this section are for printing .PDF documents. However, any print-ready
file type can be substituted.
Use one of the following methods to send print-ready files to the device.
Topics:
●
Print-ready file printing by using FTP through a browser
●
Print-ready file printing by using FTP on a direct network connection
●
Print-ready file printing by using an optional parallel port
●
Print-ready file printing in an MS Windows network
●
Print-ready file printing in UNIX systems
●
Print-ready file printing by using the LPR command
Print-ready file printing by using FTP through a browser
Complete the following steps to print print-ready files directly by using FTP through a browser on MS
Windows or Macintosh operating systems.
1.
Make note of the TCP/IP address on the HP Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded
Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration
page, see Print the configuration page on page 275.
2.
Open a browser window.
3.
In the address line of the browser, type ftp://<IPADDRESS>. For example, if the TCP/IP
address of the device is 192.168.0.90, type the following:
FTP:// 192.168.0.90
ENWW
4.
Locate the print-ready file for the device.
5.
Drag and drop the print-ready file onto the PORT1 icon in the browser window.
Print print-ready documents 285
If the PORT1 icon does not appear as a folder name, you might have to enable folder viewing
for FTP sites in your Web browser. In Microsoft Internet Explorer, use the following procedure to
enable the folder view.
a.
Select Tools, select Internet Options, and then click the Advanced tab.
b.
Select the Enable folder view for FTP sites.
c.
Click OK to save the setting.
Print-ready file printing by using FTP on a direct network connection
If the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology uses a direct network connection,
use file transfer protocol (FTP) to print a print-ready file. Complete the following steps:
1.
Take note of the TCP/IP address on the HP Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect
page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see
Print the configuration page on page 275.
2.
Open a command window on the computer.
3.
Type ftp://<TCP/IP printer ADDRESS>. For example, if the TCP/IP address is
192.168.0.90, type the following:
ftp://192.168.0.90
4.
Press Enter on the keyboard.
5.
When prompted for the user name, press Enter.
6.
When prompted for the password, press Enter.
7.
Type bin at the command prompt.
8.
Press Enter. The message 200 Types set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files
appears in the command window.
9.
Type put <FILENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the print-ready file to be printed,
including the path. For example, type the following:
put C:\LJ\<file name>.PDF
NOTE: If the file name or path includes a space, enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type put "c:\My Documents\LJ\<file name>.PDF"
The following series of messages appears in the command window:
200 PORT command successful
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection
226 Ready
226 Processing Job
10. Press Enter on the keyboard.
11. The print-ready file prints.
286 Chapter 7   Engineering details
ENWW
12. At the command prompt, type bye to exit the FTP command.
13. At the command prompt, type exit to return to the MS Windows interface.
Print-ready file printing by using an optional parallel port
The procedure for printing directly by using an optional parallel port depends on the operating system.
Topics:
●
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
The print-ready file can be sent directly to the device by typing a copy command at a command
prompt or in an MS-DOS window.
1.
At a command prompt, type copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>, where <FILENAME> is the
name of the print-ready file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the
appropriate device port (such as LPT1). For example, type the following:
C:\>copy /b c:\<file name>.PDF lpt1
2.
Press Enter on the keyboard. The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel,
and the job prints.
NOTE: If the file name or path includes a space, enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\<file
name>.PDF".
3.
At the command prompt, type exit to close the command window.
Print-ready file printing in an MS Windows network
If the device is shared on an MS Windows network, complete the following steps.
1.
From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type copy /b <FILENAME> \
\<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the print-ready file
(including the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer (connected to the device
by a USB) from which the device is being shared, and <SHARENAME> is the device share name.
For example, type the following:
C:\>copy /b c:\xxxxFW.PDF \\COMPUTERNAME\SHARENAME
NOTE: If the file name or path includes a space, enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\<file
name>.PDF" \\COMPUTERNAME\SHARENAME
2.
ENWW
Press Enter on the keyboard. The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel,
and the job prints. The message 1 file(s) copied appears on the computer screen.
Print print-ready documents 287
To share the device, do the following:
1.
Click Start.
2.
Click Settings.
3.
Click Properties (Windows 2000) or Printers or Faxes (Windows XP Professional and
Windows Server 2003) or Printers and Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home).
4.
Right-click the device name.
5.
Click Properties.
6.
Click the Sharing tab.
7.
Click the Share this printer button.
8.
Enter a share name.
9.
Click Apply. Then, click OK to close.
Print-ready file printing in UNIX systems
For UNIX systems, any command method that delivers the print-ready file to the device is acceptable,
including the following:
At the command prompt, type cp </home/yourmachine/FILENAME/ dev/parallel>, where
</home/yourmachine/FILENAME> is the location of the print-ready file.
Print-ready file printing by using the LPR command
This direct-printing method is for use in Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003.
Complete the following steps to print a print-ready file by using the LPR command.
1.
Make note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect
page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see
Print the configuration page on page 275.
2.
From a command window, type the following:
lpr -P IPADDRESS -S IPADDRESS -o l FILENAME lpr -S <IPADDRESS> -Pbinps
<FILENAME>
where IPADDRESS can be either the TCP/IP address or the host name of the device, and where
FILENAME is the file name of the print-ready file.
The parameter (-o l) consists of a lowercase "O", not a zero, and a lowercase "L", not the
numeral 1. This parameter sets the transport protocol to binary mode.
3.
The file prints, but no messages appear in the command prompt window.
4.
Type exit at the command prompt to close the command window.
288 Chapter 7   Engineering details
ENWW
Paper attributes
Topics:
●
Paper sources and destinations
●
Paper-source commands
●
Driver-supported paper sizes
●
Driver-supported paper types
●
Custom paper sizes
●
Media-type commands
Paper sources and destinations
The following table indicates the standard and optional paper sources and destinations for the HP
CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology.
Table 7-5  HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology – Paper sources and
destinations
Paper sources
Paper destinations
80-sheet manual feed tray (Tray 1)
Standard
500-sheet paper trays (Tray 2 – 4)
Standard
4000-sheet high-capacity tray (Tray 5)
Optional
Single output bin
Standard
HP 4-Bin Job Separator
Optional
HP Multifunction Finisher
Optional
Paper-source commands
The PCL 6 attribute for paper source is ubyte # MediaSource or ubyte_array "string"
MediaSource. See the following table for values of #. For example, "ubyte 4 MediaSource" is
the command for Tray 2.
The PCL 5 escape sequence for media source is Esc&l#H (the "l" is a lowercase "L" rather than the
numeral "1"). See the following table for values of #. For example, Esc&l1H is the command for
Tray 2.
Table 7-6  HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology – Paper-source
commands
Paper source
ENWW
PCL 6
PCL 5
PostScript
ubyte #
MediaSource or
ubyte_array
"string"
MediaSource1
Esc&l#H
/MediaPosition # /
ManualFeed true |
false or null
Manual feed in tray 1
2
2
3 true
Tray 1 (manual feed)
3
4
3 false
Paper attributes 289
Table 7-6  HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology – Paper-source
commands (continued)
Paper source
1
PCL 6
PCL 5
PostScript
ubyte #
MediaSource or
ubyte_array
"string"
MediaSource1
Esc&l#H
/MediaPosition # /
ManualFeed true |
false or null
Tray 2 (500-sheet)
4
1
0 false
Tray 3 (500-sheet)
5
5
1 false
Tray 4 (500-sheet)
7
8
4 false
Tray 5 (4000-sheet highcapacity)
5
9
38 false
Automatically Select
NA
NA
NA
Printer Auto Select
1
7
null false
For the string value, include the quotation marks around the variable. For example, ubyte_array "TRAY2"
MediaSource is the PCL 6 command for Tray 2.
Driver-supported paper sizes
The following table lists the features and attributes of various paper listed under the Page size: dropdown menu on the Paper/Quality tab. The list order can vary, depending on the device and
operating system. The list contains all of the following sizes, and might contain sizes from other drivers.
Table 7-7  HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology – Supported paper sizes
and attributes
Paper sizes1
Width
Height
PCL 6
Letter
216 mm
280 mm
"LETTER"
(8.5 inches)
(11.0 inches)
216 mm
356 mm
(8.5 inches)
(14.0 inches)
184 mm
267 mm
(7.25 inches)
(10.5 inches)
140 mm
216 mm
(5.5 inches)
(8.5 inches)
216  mm
330 mm
(8.5 inches)
(13 inches)
280 mm
432 mm
(11 inches)
(17 inches)
305 mm
457 mm
(12 inches)
(18 inches)
Legal
Executive
Statement
8.5 x 13
11 x 17
12 x 18
290 Chapter 7   Engineering details
2
"LEGAL"
"EXEC"
"STATEMENT"
"8.5x13"
“11x17”
“12x18”
ENWW
Table 7-7  HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology – Supported paper sizes
and attributes (continued)
Paper sizes1
Width
Height
PCL 6
4x6
102 mm
152 mm
“4x6”
(4 inches)
(6 inches)
127 mm
178 mm
(5 inches)
(7 inches)
127 mm
203 mm
(5 inches)
(8 inches)
297 mm
420 mm
(11.69 inches)
(16.54 inches)
210 mm
297 mm
(8.27 inches)
(11.69 inches)
148 mm
210 mm
(5.83 inches)
(8.27 inches)
305 mm
430 mm
(12.01 inches)
(16.93 inches)
215 mm
305 mm
(8.46 inches)
(12.01 inches)
225 mm
320 mm
(8.86 inches)
(12.6 inches)
257 mm
364 mm
(10.12 inches)
(14.33 inches)
182 mm
257 mm
(7.17 inches)
(10.1 inches)
128 mm
182 mm
(5.04 inches)
(7.17 inches)
273 mm
394 mm
(10.75 inches)
(15.5 inches)
197 mm
273 mm
(7.75 inches)
(10.75 inches)
Minimum:
Minimum:
102 mm
152 mm
(4 inches)
(6 inches)
Maximum:
Maximum:
5x7
5x8
A3
A4
A5
RA3
RA4
SRA4
B4 (JIS)
B5 (JIS)
B6 (JIS)
8K
16K
Custom
ENWW
2
“5x7”
“5x8”
“A3”
"A4"
"A5"
“RA3”
“RA4”
“SRA4”
“JIS B4”
"JIS B5"
“JIS B6”
“ROC8K
"ROC16K"
3
Paper attributes 291
Table 7-7  HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology – Supported paper sizes
and attributes (continued)
Paper sizes1
Width
Height
320 mm
457 mm
(12.6 inches)
(18 inches)
PCL 6
2
1
For all paper sizes, the PCL 6 margins are 100 dots, at 600 dots per inch.
2
The PCL 6 command for paper size is ubyte_array “String” MediaSize. The values in this column are the values for "String."
3
For custom sizes, the HP PCL 6 driver specifies actual dimensions, for example, for 8 x 9-inch custom size, "real32_xy 8.0
9.0 CustomMediaSize ubyte eInch CustomMediaSizeUnits."
Driver-supported paper types
When you select a paper type, you are instructing the device to use a group of predefined settings to
create the best possible print quality for that type of paper.
CAUTION: Selecting a paper type that does not match the type of paper that is loaded in the
tray can damage the device.
The following table shows the paper types that the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline
Technology print-drivers support.
Table 7-8  Supported paper types for each tray
Paper type that is listed in the
printer driver or on the control
panel
Description
Tray 1
Trays 2, 3,
and 4
Tray 5
Plain
Plain, uncoated paper that is less
than 150 g/m2 (40 lb bond)
X
X
X
HP  Office LG
A3 or 11x17 inch paper that is
known to be long-grain and less than
150 g/m2 (40 lb bond)
X
X
X
HP Matte Premium 120g
Use only for HP Premium
Presentation Matte Paper, 120 g/m2
X
 
 
HP Matte Brochure 180g
Use only for HP Brochure and Flyer
Paper Matte, 180 g/m2
X
 
 
HP Matte Cover 200g
Use only for this HP-brand paper.
X
 
 
HP Glossy Edgilne 180g
Use only for HP Glossy for Edgeline
Paper, 180 g/m2
X
 
 
HP Glossy Edgline 220g
Use only for HP Glossy for Edgeline
Paper, 220 g/m2
X
 
 
Cardstock
Plain, uncoated paper that is from
160 to 220 g/m2 (60 to 80 lb cover)
X
 
 
Cardstock
Plain, uncoated paper that is from
160 to 180 g/m2 (60 to 67 lb cover)
X
X
X
Matte
Plain, uncoated paper.
X
X
X
X
X
X
A3 or 11x17 inch paper must
be long-grain.
Matte Brochure
Plain, uncoated paper.
292 Chapter 7   Engineering details
ENWW
Table 7-8  Supported paper types for each tray (continued)
Paper type that is listed in the
printer driver or on the control
panel
Description
Tray 1
Trays 2, 3,
and 4
Tray 5
A3 or 11x17 inch paper must
be long-grain.
Matte Cover
Plain, uncoated paper that is from
160 to 220 g/m2 (60 to 80 lb cover)
X
 
 
Labels
Uncoated, non-glossy labels
X
 
 
Letterhead
Fine, uncoated paper that is less than
150 g/m2 (40 lb bond)
X
X
X
Preprinted
Plain, uncoated paper that is less
than 150 g/m2 (40 lb bond)
X
X
X
Prepunched
Letter (3-hole) or A4 (2- or 4-hole)
size paper that is less than 150 g/m2
(40 lb bond)
X
X
X
Colored
Plain, uncoated paper that is less
than 150 g/m2 (40 lb bond)
X
X
X
Bond
Fine, uncoated paper that is less than
150 g/m2 (40 lb bond)
X
X
X
Recycled
Plain, uncoated paper that is less
than 150 g/m2 (40 lb bond)
X
X
X
Custom paper sizes
The following table shows custom paper sizes that are available for the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color
MFP with Edgeline Technology.
Table 7-9  HP PCL 6 driver custom paper sizes
Tray
Dimensions
Minimum
Maximum
Tray 1 (80-sheet manual feed)
Width
76 mm (3.0 inches)
215 mm (8.5 inches)
Height
127 mm (5.0 inches)
356 mm (14.0 inches)
Width
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
215 mm (8.5 inches)
Height
210 mm (8.26 inches)
356 mm (14.0 inches)
Trays 5 (4000-sheet highcapacity, optional)
Width
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
215 mm (8.5 inches)
Height
210 mm (8.26 inches)
356 mm (14.0 inches)
Duplexing unit
Width
148.0 mm (5.83 inches)
215 mm (8.5 inches)
Height
210.0 mm (8.26 inches)
356 mm (14.0 inches)
Trays 2 – 4 (500-sheet)
NOTE:
ENWW
The HP Stacker/Stapler/Job Separator does not support custom paper sizes.
Paper attributes 293
Media-type commands
The HP PCL 5 driver escape sequence for paper type is "Esc&n#Wdpapertype", where "n#" is the
number of characters in the paper type plus 1. For example, in the sequence "Esc&n6WdPlain",
"Plain" has 5 letters plus 1, for a total of 6.
Table 7-10  HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology – Media-type commands
1
Esc&
n#
Wd
Paper type
Esc&
6
Wd
Plain
Esc&
11
Wd
Preprinted
Esc&
11
Wd
Letterhead
Esc&
11
Wd
Prepunched
Esc&
7
Wd
Labels
Esc&
5
Wd
Bond
Esc&
9
Wd
Recycled
Esc&
6
Wd
Color
Esc&
6
Wd
Light <75 g/m2
Esc&
6
Wd
Heavy
Esc&
11
Wd
Cardstock > 163 g/m21
Esc&
6
Wd
Rough
The correct command for cardstock is "Esc&n11WdCard Stock", with a space between the "d" and the "S", and with an
uppercase "S".
294 Chapter 7   Engineering details
ENWW
Uninstall
Topics:
●
Uninstall the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology printing-system
software by using Windows Add/Remove Program
●
Uninstall the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology printing-system
software by using the Windows Installation CD
Uninstall the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline
Technology printing-system software by using Windows Add/
Remove Program
Follow these steps to uninstall the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology printingsystem software by using Windows Add/Remove Programs.
NOTE: To uninstall the software from Windows 2000 or Windows XP, you must log on with
administrator privileges.
1.
Quit all open programs.
2.
Click Start, navigate to Control Panel, and then double-click Add or Remove Programs.
3.
Click Change or Remove Programs on the left side of the window, and then click the name
of the device.
4.
Click Remove.
5.
The Important Uninstall Information dialog box appears. Click Continue. The Cleanup
progress dialog box appears. The progress bar reflects the status of the uninstall process.
6.
When the uninstall process is complete, the Restart dialog box appears. Click Restart to restart
the computer and finish the uninstall process.
Uninstall the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline
Technology printing-system software by using the Windows
Installation CD
Uninstall the HP CM8060/CM8050 Color MFP with Edgeline Technology printing-system software by
using the Windows installation CD. See Modify a pre-existing installation on page 126 in this STR for
instructions.
ENWW
Uninstall 295
296 Chapter 7   Engineering details
ENWW
Index
Symbols/Numerics
% of Normal Size setting 204
A
About tab
fax driver 162
print drivers 247
accessibility,
documentation 20, 23
accessories, automatic
configuration 40
Acrobat Reader
installing 34
viewing
documentation 17, 21, 24, 25,
27, 29
ADA (Americans with Disabilities
Act) compliance 20, 23
Add Printer installation 129
Add program 295
Additional Software Details dialog
box, Customization Wizard 143
Additional Software dialog box,
Customization Wizard 142
Address Book page 74
administrator CD-ROM 22
administrator documentation 25
Adobe Acrobat Reader
installing 34
printing PDF files without 285
viewing
documentation 17, 21, 24, 25,
27, 29
Adobe RGB color space 231
Advanced Printing Features setting,
drivers 184
Advanced tab
fax driver 160, 165
print drivers 180
ENWW
Agree dialog box, Macintosh 258
Alerts page 63
Alternative Letterhead Mode 186
Americans with Disabilities Act
(ADA) compliance 20, 23
application settings 173
ASCII format 242
ASCII output protocol, PS
Emulation driver 242
asset number 57
Authenticate dialog box,
Macintosh 256
autoconfiguration of drivers 40
autoconfiguration, driver 40, 244
autoconfiguration, Enterprise
about 41
autorun CD-ROM, Windows 33
AutoSend 64
B
Back button, Windows installation
dialog boxes 97
Back to Front printing, drivers 186
Backup and Restore page 72
Basic Installation
dialog boxes, Windows 99
bidirectional communication
about 41
Enterprise Autoconfiguration 41
binary data, sending 242
binary output protocol, PS
Emulation driver 242
binding settings 211
bins
accessory options 244
custom paper sizes 194
included 289
Output Options 218
black, printing all text as 185
booklet printing settings 212
books and booklets 212
both sides, printing on 211
Browse for Printer dialog box,
Customization Wizard 134
C
Cancel button, Windows
installation dialog boxes 97
cardstock, paper type
commands 294
cartridges
AutoSend feature 64
features 5
usage information 54
CD-ROM
directory structure,
Macintosh 251
directory structure, Windows 10
documentation 17, 33
included 9
installer, Windows printingsystem software 32
installing Macintosh printingsystem software 254
installing Windows printingsystem software 96
languages, Macintosh 251
languages, Windows 10
Mac OS installation 21
system administrator 22
Windows installation 18
CD-ROM icon, Macintosh 255
Change TCP/IP Settings dialog
box, Windows 111
Check Printer Connection dialog
box, Windows 112
CHM files, viewing 17
Citrix Terminal Server support 8
Index 297
collation settings
fax driver 167
print drivers 182, 245
Color Options group box 229
Color Quality group box 199
Color Quality settings 200
Color Themes group box 231
colors
saturated 231
command-line printing,
Windows 285
command-line silent install for
Windows 148
commands, paper
size 292
source 289
type 294
common installer, features 35
components, software
Macintosh 250, 253
Windows 8
configuration
outgoing e-mail 62
return e-mail address 63
Configuration Page, HP EWS 49
configuration page, printing 275
Configuration tab, HP EWS 82
Configure Device page, HP
EWS 61
Confirm Network Settings dialog
box, Windows 109
connectivity
bidirectional communication
support 41
features 5
constraint messages 178
context-sensitive help
fax driver 157
print drivers 178
continuous export 45
contrast enhancement 201
control panel
language 68
settings 173
viewing with HP EWS 57
Copy Count settings
fax driver 167
print drivers 182, 245
Ctrl-D settings 242
298 Index
Custom Installation
choosing 33
dialog boxes, Windows 99
Custom Installer Location dialog
box, Customization Wizard 144
custom paper sizes 193, 293
Custom Profile setting 231
Customization Wizard
dialog boxes 130
languages, Windows 10
customizing
installers 35, 44
D
Date & Time page, HP EWS 69
default print settings 169
default printer, setting 149
deleting job-storage jobs 226
destinations, paper 289
Details dialog box 118, 120
Device and Supplies Status, fax
driver 171
device control panel
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color
MFP with Edgeline
Technology 177
Device Information page 57
Device Information page, HP
EWS 68
Device Services, drivers 234
Device Settings dialog box,
Customization Wizard 141
Device Settings tab
fax driver 161
print drivers 235
Device Status page, HP EWS 48
diagnostics 46, 233
Diagnostics section, HP EWS 83
dialog boxes, printing-system
software installation
Mac OS X 255
Windows 99
Windows Customization
Wizard 130
digital flash setting 201
digital imaging options 200
Digital Sending tab, HP EWS 73
DIMMs, fonts
driver settings 239
direct-connect installation 98
directory structure, CD-ROM
Macintosh 251
Windows 10
Disable Your Firewall dialog box,
Windows Vista 103
disabling
driver features 44
disk space requirements
Linux 7
Mac OS 7
Macintosh 250
UNIX 7
Windows 6
Document Options
fax driver 167
print drivers 183, 210
document preview image
fax driver 170
print drivers 199, 204, 214
Document Properties
fax driver 156
documentation
administrator 25
HP Driver Preconfiguration
Support Guide 29
HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide 27
install notes 19, 26
Installer Customization Wizard
Administrator's Guide 29
languages, Windows 10
Quick Reference Guide 20, 23
screen-readable 20
user 22
viewing 17, 33
double-sided printing 211
download
firmware 276
downloading
printing-system software 9
Driver Configuration dialog box,
Customization Wizard 140
Driver Details dialog box,
Customization Wizard 139
drivers
% of Normal Size 204
About tab 247
accessing 175
accessory configuration 40
Add Printer installation 129
ENWW
Advanced Printing Features 184
Advanced tab 180
Alternative Letterhead
Mode 186
autoconfiguration of 40
Automatic Configuration 244
automatic configuration 41
booklets 212
Color Quality settings 200
constraint messages 178
continuous export feature 45
Copy Count settings 182
custom paper sizes 293
Device Services 234
Device Settings tab 235
diagnostics 46
Document Options 183, 210
document preview
image 199, 204, 214
duplexing 211
Effects tab 202
Enterprise Autoconfiguration 41
features 173
Finishing tab 209
Flip Pages Up 211
Font DIMM Installer 239
font settings 239
Form to Tray Assignment 237
Graphic setting 182
Help system 178
included 36
Installable Options settings 244
Job-storage settings 221
JPEG Passthrough 246
languages, Windows 10
Layout Options 186
lockable features 44
Macintosh 250, 253
Mopier settings 245
Output tab 216
Pages per Sheet 213
Paper Options 191
paper size commands 292
paper sizes supported 290
paper source commands 289
paper supported 289
paper type commands 294
Paper/Output settings 181
Paper/Quality tab 190
Point-and-Print installation 148
ENWW
PostScript Options 184
PostScript Passthrough 246
preconfiguration 43
preconfiguration support 29
Printer Features 185
Printing Preferences tabs 175
Properties tabs 176
Resizing Options settings 203
Scale to Fit 203
Services tab 233
settings 173
standalone 8
TrueType font settings 183
universal print drivers 37
Update Now 41
version numbers 38
Watermarks settings 205
See also fax driver
Drivers dialog box, Customization
Wizard 138
duplexing unit
custom paper sizes 194
driver settings 211
E
e-mail
AutoSend 64
return address, configuring 63
server settings 62
E-mail Server page, HP EWS 62
E-mail Setup page 76
Easy Install dialog box,
Macintosh 258
Edit Other Links page 67
Effects tab 202
embeddeded Web server
launching 171
Energy Star compliance 4
Enterprise Autoconfiguration
about 41
escape sequences
paper source 289
paper type 294
Euro symbol 243
Event Log page, HP EWS 52
EWS
about 47
AutoSend 64
Configuration 82
Configure Device 61
Control Panel Snapshot
page 57
Date & Time 69
Device configuration page 49
Device Information 57
Device Information page 68
Device Status page 48
Diagnostics 83
Digital Sending tab 73
E-mail Server 62
Edit Other LInks 67
Event Log 52
Information tab 48
Language 68
navigation 48
Network Settings 82
Networking tab 82
Print page 59
Security 65, 83
Security page 83
Settings 60
Supplies Status page 51
Usage Page 54
EWS (Macintosh)
about 253, 271
accessing 271
EWS (Windows)
accessing 47
Kerberos authentication 84
login process 84
password behavior 86
protected system 85
unprotected system 86
exporting driver parameters 45
External Fonts settings, PCL
drivers 239
F
Fax Activity Log page 80
fax driver
about 153
About tab 162
accessing 154
Advanced tab 160, 165
Device and Supplies Status 171
Device Settings tab 161
Document Options 167
document preview image 170
Document Properties tab 156
firmware requirements 150
Index 299
General tab 158
Help system 157
installation 150, 151
languages, Windows 10
Launch Embedded Web
Server 171
operating systems supported 38
orientation 170
Paper Options 169
Paper/Output tab 166
Paper/Quality tab 167
Ports tab 159
Print Task Quick Sets 168
Printing Defaults tab 156
Printing Defaults tabs 155
Printing Preferences tab 155
Printing Preferences tabs 155
Properties tabs 154
Services tab 170
Sharing tab 159
upgrading 160
Fax Send Setup page 79
Fax tab 79
Feature Selection dialog box,
Windows 119
features 4
Finish dialog box, Customization
Wizard 148
Finish dialog box, Windows 129
Finish dialog box, Windows
Vista 125
Finish dialog box, Windows
XP 124
Finish Up dialog box,
Macintosh 259
Finishing tab 209
Firewall Detected dialog box,
Windows XP 102
firmware
about updating remotely 274
determining current level 275
download 276
fax driver requirements 150
FTP updates, direct network
connections 279
HP Web Jetadmin updates 283
LPR command updates 282
messages during update 277
parallel port updates 280
troubleshooting updates 277
300 Index
UNIX updates 282
verifying installation 278
Windows network updates 281
flash, digital 201
Flip Pages Up 211
font attributes 207
Font Substitution Table, PS
Emulation driver 238
fonts
DIMM settings, drivers 239
driver settings 183
Euro symbol 243
External, PCL drivers 239
files names of 90
languages, Windows 10
PS Emulation driver 243
Windows 90, 92
fonts, external
installing 240
removing 241
Form to Tray Assignment,
drivers 237
FTP
firmeware updates 279
print-ready files 285, 286
Full Installation
dialog boxes, Windows 99
G
General tab, fax driver 158
Graphic settings 182
graphics mode 186
grayscale settings, PS Emulation
driver 243
grayscale tones 230
H
hard disk
driver settings 245
heavy paper, paper type
commands 294
help
fax driver 157
print drivers 178
Help button, Windows installation
dialog boxes 97
help, context-sensitive 157
HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check
Tool 46
HP Driver Preconfiguration 43
HP Driver Preconfiguration Support
Guide 29
HP Embedded Web Server
about 47
AutoSend 64
Configuration 82
configuration page 49
Configure Device 61
Control Panel Snapshot
page 57
Date & Time 69
Device Information 57
Device Information page 68
Device Status page 48
Diagnostics section 83
Digital Sending tab 73
E-mail Server 62
Edit Other Links 67
Event Log page 52
Information tab 48
Language 68
navigation 48
Network Settings 82
Networking tab 82
Print page 59
Security 65, 83
Security page 83
Settings 60
Supplies Status page 51
Usage Page 54
HP Embedded Web Server
(Macintosh)
about 253, 271
accessing 271
HP Embedded Web Server
(Windows)
accessing 47
Kerberos authentication 84
login process 84
password behavior 86
protected system 85
unprotected system 86
HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide 27
HP LaserJet Macintosh installer
startup screen 256
HP OpenVMS 8
HP PCL drivers. See PCL drivers
HP PS 3 Emulation driver. See PS
Emulation driver
ENWW
HP Software dialog box,
Macintosh 255
HP Web Jetadmin
downloading 87
Driver Preconfiguration
Plugin 43, 44
firmware updates 283
HTML files, viewing 17
I
ICM (Image Color Management)
options 183
Image Color Management (ICM)
options 183
image optimization 231
imaging options 200
Import Speed Dials page 81
Incompatible Print Settings
messages 178
Information tab, HP EWS 48
ink cartridges
AutoSend feature 64
features 5
usage information 54
input trays. See trays
Install Network Printer Wizard
(INPW) 8
install notes 19, 26
Installable Options
PS Emulation driver 244
installation
Add Printer 129
Adobe Acrobat Reader 34
command-line silent 148
Customization Wizard for
Windows 130
dialog boxes, Mac OS X 255
fax driver 150
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color
MFP with Edgeline
Technology 97
Mac OS CD-ROM 21
Mac OS X V10.2.8 setup 268
Mac OS X V10.3.9 setup 264
Mac OS X V10.4 and later
setup 260
Macintosh printing-system
software 254
Point and Print 148
pre-existing, modifying 126
ENWW
system requirements for Linux 7
system requirements for Mac
OS 7
system requirements for
Macintosh 250
system requirements for UNIX 7
system requirements for
Windows 6
troubleshooting Macintosh 271
Unsupported Operating System
dialog box 98
Windows CD-ROM 18
Windows printing-system
software 96
installation CD-ROM
Macintosh 251
Installation Status dialog box,
Windows 123
Installation Type dialog box,
Windows 117
installer customization
wizard 35, 44
Installer Customization Wizard
Administrator's Guide 29
installers
common, features 35
customizing 130
Windows 32
Installing dialog box,
Customization Wizard 147
Installing dialog box,
Macintosh 259
Invalid Selection dialog box,
Customization Wizard 142
IP printing 267, 270
J
Jetadmin. See HP Web Jetadmin
Jetdirect Administrator's Guide 27
job names 225
job storage
deleting jobs 226
driver settings 221, 245
features 4
modes 223
notification options 224
Personal Job 223
printing 226
Proof and Hold 223
Quick Copy 224
retrieve jobs 226
status 223
Job Timeout settings 243
JPEG Passthrough 246
K
Kerberos authentication 84
L
landscape orientation
fax driver 170
print drivers 211, 214
Language dialog box,
Customization Wizard 133
Language page, HP EWS 68
language, encoded in file name 20
languages
Macintosh CD-ROMs 251
Windows CD-ROMs 10
Launch Embedded Web
Server 171
Layout Options 186
letterhead, alternative mode 186
License Agreement, Customization
Wizard 132
License dialog box, Macintosh 257
links, HP EWS 67
Linux operating systems
support for 7
localized CD-ROMs
Macintosh 251
Windows 10
Location dialog box,
Customization Wizard 144
lockable features, drivers 44
login process
HP Embedded Web Server
(Windows) 84
LPR commands
firmware updates 282
print-ready files 288
M
Mac OS installation CD 21
Mac OS operating systems
support for 7
Macintosh operating systems
components, software 253
dialog boxes, Mac OS X
printing-system software
installation 255
Index 301
directory structure, software CDROM 251
drivers supported 38
hardware requirements 250
HP Embedded Web Server
(EWS) 271
install notes 254
installing printing-system
software 254
localized software CDs 251
PDEs 253
PPDs 253
setting up with Mac OS X
V10.2.8 268
setting up with Mac OS X
V10.3.9 264
setting up with Mac OS X
V10.4 and later 260
software components 250
support 7
supported 250
troubleshooting setup 271
uninstalling printing-system
software 271
manuals. See documentation
margins
PCL 6 driver 292
media. See paper
memory
base 4
driver settings 244
Linux requirements 7
Mac OS requirements 7
Macintosh requirements 250
PS Emulation driver settings 242
UNIX requirements 7
Windows requirements 6
menu map, printing 276
message angle on watermarks 207
message on watermarks 207
messages, constraint 178
Microsoft Windows. See Windows
model number 57
models, features 4
Mopier mode 209, 245
Mopier settings 245
MS Windows Cluster Server 8
support 8
302 Index
N
Network Folder Setup page 78
Network Path dialog box,
Customization Wizard 134
Network Settings, HP EWS 82
Networking tab, HP EWS 82
networks
Confirm Network Settings
dialog box 109
Customization Wizard
settings 135
firewalls 102, 103
firmware updates 281
HP Driver Preconfiguration 43
HP Driver Preconfiguration
Support Guide 29
HP Jetdirect Administrator's
Guide 27
HP Web Jetadmin,
downloading 87
Install Network Printer Wizard
(INPW) 8
Installer Customization Wizard
Administrator's 29
Point-and-Print installation 148
print-ready files 287
Windows printing-system
software installation 97
neutral grays 230
Next Steps — Congratulations
dialog box, Windows 126
Notification Server page 62
number of copies
fax driver 167
number of copies, setting
print drivers 182, 245
O
operating systems
availability of software
components 8
standalone drivers 8
supported 7
optimization of images 231
Optimizations option, PCL
drivers 184
orientation
fax driver 170
print drivers 211, 214
Other Links area 67
Output Bin Options 219
output bins
accessory options 244
custom paper sizes 194
included 289
options 218
Output Options 218
Output Protocol settings, PS
Emulation driver 242
Output tab, drivers 216
P
page counts 54
Page Order settings 186, 214
page orientation
fax driver 170
print drivers 211, 214
Pages per Sheet settings 213
paper
Alternative Letterhead
Mode 186
custom sizes, driver settings 193
custom sizes, PCL driver
support 293
margins 292
Page size settings, drivers 192
Pages per Sheet settings,
drivers 213
Paper Source: settings,
drivers 194
Paper Type: settings,
drivers 195
Print Document On settings,
drivers 203
Print on Both Sides settings,
drivers 211
selecting 196
size commands 292
sizes supported 290
source commands 289
sources and destinations 289
type commands 294
types and sizes supported 289
Usage Page 54
Paper Options
fax driver 169
print drivers 191
paper sizes 169
paper source commands 289
Paper Source setting 194
ENWW
Paper Source: settings 194
Paper Type: settings 195
Paper/Output tab
fax driver 166
print drivers 181
Paper/Quality tab
fax driver 167
print drivers 190
parallel ports
firmware updates 280
print-ready files 287
password protection 83
passwords
HP EWS (Windows) 84, 86
PCL drivers
% of Normal Size 204
about 37
About tab 247
accessing 175
Advanced Printing Features 184
Advanced tab 180
Alternative Letterhead
Mode 186
Automatic Configuration 244
booklets 212
constraint messages 178
Copy Count settings 182
custom paper sizes 293
Device Services 234
Device Settings tab 235
diagnostics 46
Document Options 183, 210
document preview
image 199, 204, 214
duplexing 211
Effects tab 202
External Fonts settings 239
features 173
Finishing tab 209
Flip Pages Up 211
Font DIMM Installer 239
Font Substitution Table 238
Form to Tray Assignment 237
Graphic setting 182
Help system 178
included 38
Installable Options settings 244
Job-storage settings 221
languages, Windows 10
Layout Options 186
ENWW
Mopier settings 245
Output tab 216
Pages per Sheet 213
Paper Options 191
paper size commands 292
paper sizes supported 290
paper source commands 289
paper supported 289
paper type commands 294
Paper/Output settings 181
Paper/Quality tab 190
Print Optimizations option 184
Printer Features 185
Printing Preferences tab 175
Properties tab 176
Resizing Options settings 203
Scale to Fit 203
Services tab 233
TrueType font settings 183
Update Now 41
version numbers 38
Watermarks settings 205
PCL files, print 285
PDEs (Printer Dialog
Extensions) 253
PDF files
command-line printing 285
installing Adobe Acrobat
Reader 34
printing from HP EWS 59
viewing 17
Percentage of Normal Size
setting 204
Personal Job settings 223
PINs, personal jobs 223, 224
Please enter a hardware address
dialog box, Customization
Wizard 136
Point-and-Print installation,
Windows printing-system
software 148
Port Creation Options dialog box,
Customization Wizard 136
Port Name dialog box 115
portrait orientation
fax driver 170
print drivers 211, 214
Ports tab, fax driver 159
ports, included 5
PostScript Device settings, PS
Emulation driver 241
PostScript Options, drivers 184
PostScript Passthrough 246
PPDs, Macintosh
installation 253
pre-existing installation,
modifying 126
preconfiguration, driver 29, 43
preview image 219, 232
Print All Text as Black 185
Print Document On settings 203
print drivers
support in non-Windows
operating systems 8
universal 37
Print on Both Sides 211
Print Optimizations option, PCL
drivers 184
Print Page Borders settings 213
Print page, HP EWS 59
print settings, default 169
Print Task Quick Sets, fax
driver 168
print-driver user interface 175
print-ready files
FTP 285, 286
LPR command 288
parallel port 287
types of 285
UNIX 288
Windows network 287
Printer Connection dialog box,
Windows 101
Printer Dialog Extensions
(PDEs) 253
Printer Driver Test Page dialog
box, Windows 126
Printer Features, drivers 185
Printer Not Found dialog box,
Windows Vista 106
Printer Not Found dialog box,
Windows XP 105
Printer Port dialog box,
Customization Wizard 134
Printer Properties dialog box,
Customization Wizard 146
Printer Properties dialog box,
Windows 121
Index 303
Printer Settings dialog box,
Windows 114
printer setup
Macintosh operating
systems 260
printer, setting default 149
Printers Found dialog box,
Windows 107
printing
page orientation 170
parallel port 287
Quick Reference Guide 20, 24
stored jobs 226
Printing Defaults
fax driver 156
Printing Defaults tabs, fax
driver 155
Printing Preferences
fax driver 155
print drivers 175
Printing Preferences dialog box,
Customization Wizard 141
printing shortcuts
creating 189
predefined 189
Printing Shortcuts tab 187
problem alerts 63
Proof and Hold job settings 223
Properties tab
fax driver 154
Properties tabs
print drivers 176
protected system, HP Embedded
Web Server 85
protected systems 85
protocols 242
PS Emulation driver
% of Normal Size 204
about 37
About tab 247
accessing 175
Advanced Printing Features 184
Advanced tab 180
Alternative Letterhead
Mode 186
Automatic Configuration 244
booklets 212
constraint messages 178
Copy Count settings 182
Ctrl-D settings 242
304 Index
custom paper sizes 293
Device Services 234
Device Settings tab 235
diagnostics 46
Document Options 183, 210
document preview
image 199, 204, 214
duplexing 211
Effects tab 202
External Fonts settings 239
features 173
Finishing tab 209
Flip Pages Up 211
Font DIMM Installer 239
font settings 243
Font Substitution Table 238
Form to Tray Assignment 237
Graphic setting 182
Help system 178
included 38
Installable Options settings 244
Job-storage settings 221
JPEG Passthrough 246
languages, Windows 10
Layout Options 186
Mopier settings 245
Output Protocol settings 242
Output tab 216
Pages per Sheet 213
Paper Options 191
paper sizes supported 290
paper source commands 289
paper supported 289
Paper/Output settings 181
Paper/Quality tab 190
PostScript Device settings 241
PostScript Memory settings 242
PostScript Options 184
PostScript Passthrough 246
Printer Features 185
Printing Preferences tabs 175
Properties tabs 176
Resizing Options settings 203
Scale to Fit 203
Services tab 233
timeout settings 243
TrueType font settings 183
Update Now 41
version number 38
Watermarks settings 205
PS emulation fonts 92
PS files, printing 59, 285
Q
quality settings 200
Quick Copy jobs 224
Quick Reference Guide 20, 23
R
Raster Compression setting 185
Read Me dialog box,
Macintosh 257
Ready to Create Installer dialog
box, Customization Wizard 145
Ready to Install dialog box,
Windows 121
red eye removal 201
regional versions, CD-ROMs
Macintosh 251
Windows 10
remote firmware updates
about 274
determining current firmware
level 275
download 276
FTP, direct network
connections 279
HP Web Jetadmin 283
LPR commands 282
messages 277
parallell port 280
troubleshooting 277
UNIX 282
verifying installation 278
Windows network 281
Remove program 295
removing
Macintosh printing system 271
Resizing Options 203
resolution
print driver settings 200
retrieve job-storage jobs 226
return e-mail address 63
RFU. See remote firmware updates
RGB, Adobe 231
S
SAP printing 8
saturated colors 231
Scale to Fit setting 203
ENWW
screen-readable
documentation 20, 23
Searching dialog box 104
Security page, HP EWS 65, 83
Send Ctrl-D settings 242
send fax driver
about 153
About tab 162
accessing 154
Advanced tab 160, 165
Device and Supplies Status 171
Device Settings tab 161
Document Options 167
document preview image 170
Document Properties tab 156
firmware requirements 150
General tab 158
Help system 157
installation 150, 151
languages, Windows 10
Launch Embedded Web
Server 171
operating systems supported 38
orientation 170
Paper Options 169
Paper/Output tab 166
Paper/Quality tab 167
Ports tab 159
Print Task Quick Sets 168
Printing Defaults tab 156
Printing Defaults tabs 155
Printing Preferences tab 155
Printing Preferences tabs 155
Properties tab 154
Services tab 170
Sharing tab 159
upgrading 160
serial number 57
Services tab
fax driver 170
print drivers 233
Set Port Name dialog box 115
settings
continuous export 45
locking 44
overriding 173
Settings tab, HP EWS 60
Setup Maintenance dialog
box 127
Sharing tab, fax driver 159
ENWW
sharpness setting 201
silent installation
command-line 148
Customization Wizard 130
sizes, paper
commands 292
custom 293
driver settings 192
margins 292
Print on Both Sides settings,
drivers 211
supported 289, 290
Sleep Schedule page 71
Smart Focusing settings 201
Software License Agreement,
Customization Wizard 132
Software License dialog box,
Macintosh 257
Solution Installer page 73
source of paper 289
source, paper 194
sources, paper. See trays
Special pages list box 196
Specify Printer dialog box 113
Specify TCP/IP Port dialog box,
Customization Wizard 135
sRGB (default) 231
standalone drivers 8
status
fax driver 171
job storage 223
Supplies Status page, HP
EWS 51
status alerts 63
storage, job
driver settings 221, 245
features 4
modes 223
notification options 224
Personal Job 223
printing 226
Proof and Hold 223
Quick Copy 224
retrieve jobs 226
status 223
supplies
AutoSend feature 64
features 5
usage information 54
Supplies Status page, HP EWS 51
system administrator CD-ROM 22
system requirements
Mac OS 7
supported operating systems 6
Windows 6
T
TBCP (Tagged Binary
Communications Protocol) 242
TBCP output protocol, PS Emulation
driver 242
TCP/IP address
locating 57
TCP/IP Port dialog box,
Customization Wizard 135
TCP/IP Settings dialog box 111
Test Page dialog box,
Windows 126
text files, printing 59, 285
text, printing all as black 185
time settings
HP EWS 69
timeout settings 243
transparencies, paper type
commands 294
trays
Alternative Letterhead
Mode 186
autoconfiguration 40
custom paper sizes 194, 293
driver configuration 244
driver Form to Tray
Assignment 237
included 5, 289
paper source commands 289
Paper Source: settings,
drivers 194
paper type commands 294
Usage Page 54
troubleshooting
Diagnostics, HP EWS 83
firmware upgrades 277
HP driver Diagnostic Printer
Check Tool 46
Macintosh setup 271
Services tab, drivers 233
Unsupported Operating System
dialog box 98
Tru64 UNIX printing 8
TrueType font settings 183, 243
Index 305
TrueType fonts
sending as bitmaps 185
two-sided printing 211
types, paper
driver settings 195
Print on Both Sides settings,
drivers 211
Typical Installation
choosing 33
Typical with Fax Installation
choosing 33
U
unattended installation
command-line 148
Customization Wizard 130
uninstallation
Macintosh printing system 271
uninstalling
HP CM8060/CM8050 Color
MFP with Edgeline
Technology 295
Universal Print Driver (UPD) 35
universal print drivers 37
UNIX operating systems
print-ready files 288
remote firmware update 282
Web site for 7
unprotected system, HP EWS
(Windows) 86
Unsupported Operating System
dialog box 98
UPD (Universal Print Driver) 35
Update Now feature 41
updating firmware remotely. See
remote firmware updates
upgrading fax driver 160
usage information, AutoSend 64
Usage Page 54
USB direct-connect installation 98
user documentation 22
User Name, stored jobs 225
V
version checking 274
version numbers, drivers 38
W
Wait Timeout settings
306 Index
243
watermarks
default settings 208
message angle on 207
message on 207
Watermarks settings 205
watermarks, list of 206
Web Jetadmin. See HP Web
Jetadmin
Web sites
Citrix Terminal server support 8
downloading software 9
firmware download 276
HP Driver Diagnostic Printer
Check Tool 46
HP OpenVMS 8
HP Web Jetadmin,
downloading 87
Linux device support 7
Macintosh software 251
SAP printing 8
Tru64 UNIX printing 8
UNIX support 7
Welcome dialog box,
Customization Wizard 131
Welcome dialog box,
Windows 100
What's this? Help
fax driver 157
print drivers 178
Windows installation CD 18
Windows operating systems
Add Printer installation 129
availability of software
components 8
CD-ROM, print system 32
default printer, setting 149
dialog boxes 99
directory structure, software CDROM 10
documentation 17
driver features 173
driver versions 38
drivers supported 38
fonts supported 90
Installer Customization
Wizard 130
installing printing software 96
Point-and-Print installation 148
PS emulation fonts supported 92
remote firmware update 280
support 7
system requirements 6
wizards
installer customization 35, 44
ENWW
© 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
www.hp.com
Download PDF
Similar pages